WO2020006669A1 - Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device - Google Patents
Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2020006669A1 WO2020006669A1 PCT/CN2018/094137 CN2018094137W WO2020006669A1 WO 2020006669 A1 WO2020006669 A1 WO 2020006669A1 CN 2018094137 W CN2018094137 W CN 2018094137W WO 2020006669 A1 WO2020006669 A1 WO 2020006669A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- application icon
- user
- icon
- response
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
- G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/72—Mobile telephones; Cordless telephones, i.e. devices for establishing wireless links to base stations without route selection
- H04M1/725—Cordless telephones
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular, to a method for switching icons, a method for displaying a graphical user interface (GUI), and an electronic device.
- GUI graphical user interface
- the display interface of the electronic device includes multiple icons for providing various applications or functions.
- the target group and the icon to be switched are not on the same page of the desktop.
- the user needs to drag the icon to switch pages.
- the icon to be switched is Drag to the target group on the target page.
- the first page 101 of the mobile phone desktop includes an entertainment group 102, and the entertainment group 102 includes a Sohu video icon 103; as shown in (d) of FIG. 1,
- the second page 104 includes a video and audio group 105.
- the user can click to open the entertainment group 102; as shown in (c) of FIG.
- the user drags the Sohu video icon 103 to the border of the screen; as shown in (d) of FIG. 1, after the mobile phone switches to display the second page 104, the user continues to drag the Sohu video icon 103 into the audio and video group 105 .
- the Sohu video icon 103 is switched to the audio and video group 105. It can be seen that when switching the grouping of icons across pages, the user needs to continuously drag the icon for a long time, a long distance, and in multiple directions to perform page switching and group switching. Therefore, the operation is complicated and the operation is difficult.
- the technical solution of the present application provides an icon switching method, a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, and an electronic device, which can make a user's operation easier when switching the grouping of icons.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon;
- the opened first group is displayed;
- the set group control is displayed;
- the display is displayed A grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or,
- the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the first application icon by operating the first application icon in the first group, the first application icon can be activated and the grouping control is displayed.
- the electronic device By operating the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the group interface, or facilitates the user to create a new one composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the group interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user's operation on setting the grouped control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouped control; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press or Pressure operation; the operation of the user on the second group is the user's click, long press or pressure operation on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon;
- the opened first group is displayed;
- the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the setting
- the operation of the grouping control displays a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the first application The icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the position of the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface to form A new group, thereby switching the first application icon into the new group.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
- the first application icon in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon;
- the opened first group is displayed;
- the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the setting
- the operation of the grouping control displays a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the first application icon and the second application icon are composed. A new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can easily switch the first application icon in the first grouping to the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface.
- the two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
- the element in the grouping interface in response to a user dragging the first application icon to a loose operation after setting the grouping control, the element in the grouping interface is in a waiting state.
- the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying the setting group control; in response to the user's operation for setting the grouping control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; Operation, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to a user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- a user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping control.
- the electronic device can display a grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or facilitates the user to create a new combination of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouping control;
- the operation of the second application icon is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second application icon;
- the user's operation on the second group is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method, which is applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a setting group control; in response to a user dragging the first application icon to the setting group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to the user The operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon continues, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
- the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the second application displayed on the grouping interface.
- the positions of the icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
- the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
- the first application icon in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method, which is applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a setting group control; in response to a user dragging the first application icon to the setting group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to the user For the operation of the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed to facilitate the operation of the second application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group, or the user's operation of the second group, the first application icon switches to the new group in.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate;
- the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon by the user to set the grouping control, and the element in the grouping interface is in a waiting state.
- the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
- the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, the grouping interface is displayed. Apply the operation of the icon to display and set the grouping control; in response to the user's operation on the grouping control, display the grouping interface.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, which is applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first GUI in response to a user operation on a first application icon, and the first GUI displays Including setting grouping controls.
- the first application icon is located on the first page of the desktop, or the first application icon is located in the first group on the first page.
- a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI; or, a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the grouping control on the first GUI.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the first GUI and the first page of the desktop may be different or the same.
- the first application icon can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the setting group control is displayed on the first GUI, in response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the setting group control or in response to For the operation of setting the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user to conveniently switch the first application icon to the second grouping displayed on the grouping interface.
- the application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
- the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on setting the grouping control.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon;
- the opened first group is displayed;
- the grouping interface includes the first element, and the first element includes the first element
- Two groups or the second application icon in response to the user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located at In the second group.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the group interface is displayed, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon in the first group to the group interface.
- the displayed second group or a new group composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon to the new group.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon;
- the opened first group is displayed;
- the grouping interface includes the first element, and the first element includes the first element
- Two groups or second application icons in response to another operation of the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the grouping interface can be displayed, thereby facilitating the user to perform the first application by performing another operation on the first application icon.
- the icon is switched to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or a new group consisting of the first application icon and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface is switched, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
- the first application icon and the second application icon in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: responding In the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
- the first application icon in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group , Displaying the opened second group; in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, displaying the first application icon in the second group according to the target position.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon; in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group Or, in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the user can activate the first application icon and display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon on the first page to the grouping interface.
- the displayed second group it is convenient for the user to create a new group consisting of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the group interface, so as to switch the first application icon to the new group.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate;
- the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device.
- the method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation to display a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon.
- the first application icon and the second application icon are composed. A new group; or, the first application icon is in the second group.
- the user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to perform another operation on the first application icon to the first application icon.
- the icon is switched to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or a new group consisting of the first application icon and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface is switched, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
- the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
- the first application icon and the second application icon in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: responding In the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
- the first application icon in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group , Displaying the opened second group; in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, displaying the first application icon in the second group according to the target position.
- the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the first group on the first page.
- the user can conveniently switch the first application icon in the first group to a group other than the first group.
- the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the first group on the first page and application icons on the desktop.
- the grouping interface includes all the groups.
- the grouping interface includes all groups on the desktop and other icons except the first application icon.
- the first element is an element on the second page of the desktop.
- the user does not need to drag the first application icon in the first group on the first page to cut the screen, and can switch the first application icon in the first group on the first page to the first page icon on the second page.
- a new group is formed by the first application icon in the first group on the first page and the second application icon on the second page.
- the user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group on the second page without dragging the first application icon on the first page to cut the screen; or,
- the first application icon and the second application icon on the second page form a new group. Therefore, the operation of the user to switch the icon group is simpler.
- the electronic device after the first application icon is located in the second group, if the electronic device detects an operation of the user clicking the return key, the electronic device displays a page on which the second group is located.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Displaying the opened first group; responding to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, displaying a setting group control; and responding to the user's operation on setting the group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface including the first element,
- the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; or may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays and sets the group control.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user's operation on setting the grouped control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouped control; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press or Pressure operation; the operation of the user on the second group is the user's click, long press or pressure operation on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Display the opened first group; display the set group control in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group; respond to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, display the group interface, group
- the interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the processor is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second Group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group control; processing The device may respond to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
- the processor is configured to respond to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon The operation to the second group displays the opened second group; and in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Display the opened first group; display the set group control in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group; respond to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, display the group interface, group
- the interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group control; processing The device may respond to an operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set a grouping control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
- the processor is further configured to respond to that after the user drags the first application icon to set the grouping control and releases, the first element in the grouping interface is in a standby state.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen executes computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user For the operation of setting a grouping control, a grouping interface is displayed.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays the setting group control; the processor may respond to the user's operation on the setting group control, and the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouping control;
- the operation of the second application icon is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second application icon;
- the user's operation on the second group is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen executes computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control to display a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the processor is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second Group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a setting group control; the processor may respond to a user dragging the first application icon to set a group control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
- the processor is configured to respond to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon The operation to the second group displays the opened second group; and in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen executes computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control to display a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a setting group control; the processor may respond to a user dragging the first application icon to set a group control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate;
- the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first GUI in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, and the first GUI includes a setting grouping control.
- the first application icon is located on the first page of the desktop, or the first application icon is located in the first group on the first page.
- a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control on the first GUI; or a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of dragging a first application icon to a grouping control on the first GUI.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the touch screen is configured to display the first GUI in response to a user's operation on the first application icon.
- the touch screen may be configured to display the first GUI in response to the user's operation on the first application icon.
- the grouping interface is displayed in response to the user's operation of setting the grouping control on the first GUI.
- the processor may respond to the user's operation of setting the grouping control on the first GUI and the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
- the processor may respond to the user dragging the first application icon to the first GUI to set up a grouping control. Operation, the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on setting the grouping control.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen executes computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, The opened first group is displayed; in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a group interface is displayed, the group interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor responds to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group interface.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen executes computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, The opened first group is displayed; in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a group interface is displayed, the group interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon.
- the processor is configured to, in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group interface.
- the user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
- the processor is configured to respond to another operation of the first application icon by the user, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group, Including: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, The first application icon is located in the second group.
- the processor is configured to respond to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group by the user, and the first application icon is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to The operation of the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user operation on the first application icon, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first One element, the first element includes a second grouping or a second application icon.
- the processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon;
- the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate;
- the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories.
- the touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions.
- the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user operation on the first application icon, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first One element, the first element includes a second group or a second application icon; in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located at In the second group.
- the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
- the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
- the processor is configured to respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: In response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first The application icon is in the second group.
- the processor is configured to respond to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation for setting a grouping control.
- the display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group.
- the processing unit is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group in.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, or an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group.
- the processing unit is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon For the operation of two groups, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group.
- the processing unit is further configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group in.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation for setting a grouping control.
- the processing unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group.
- the processing unit is further configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group Grouping.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, or an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group.
- the processing unit is further configured to, in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to For the operation of the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit.
- the display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon.
- the input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon.
- the display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- the input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- the input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group.
- the processing unit is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the input unit and the display unit in the above embodiments may be a touch display screen.
- the processing unit may be a processor, such as an application processor.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium including computer instructions.
- the computer instructions When the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to perform icon switching in any of the possible designs in the foregoing aspects.
- Method or method for displaying the GUI Method or method for displaying the GUI.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product.
- the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute an icon switching method or a method of displaying a GUI in any of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects. .
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a switch icon grouping provided by the prior art
- FIG. 2A is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application.
- 2B is a schematic diagram of a software architecture of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 2C is a flowchart of icon processing according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a first page and a second page on a desktop according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a set of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- 14A is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- 14B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- 15 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 21 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- 22 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 25 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 26 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise stated, the meaning of "a plurality" is two or more.
- the icon switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to an electronic device having a touch display screen.
- the electronic device may be a portable electronic device including other functions such as a personal digital assistant and / or a music player function, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wearable device with a wireless communication function (such as a smart watch), and the like.
- Exemplary embodiments of portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, carrying Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems.
- the aforementioned portable electronic device may also be other portable electronic devices, such as a laptop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch panel), or the like. It should also be understood that, in other embodiments of the present application, the above electronic device may not be a portable electronic device, but a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (such as a touch panel).
- the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone 200.
- the embodiment is specifically described below by taking the mobile phone 200 as an example. It should be understood that the mobile phone 200 shown in FIG. 2A is only an example of an electronic device, and the mobile phone 200 may have more or fewer components than those shown in the figure, and two or more components may be combined. Or it can have different component configurations.
- the various components shown in FIG. 2A may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and / or application specific integrated circuits.
- the mobile phone 200 may include one or more processors 201, radio frequency (RF) circuits 202, memory 203, touch screen 204, Bluetooth device 205, one or more sensors 206, and wireless fidelity ( wireless fidelity (wifi) device 207, positioning device 208, audio circuit 209, peripheral interface 210, and power system 211. These components can be connected together, for example, these components communicate via one or more buses or signal lines (not shown in FIG. 2A). Those skilled in the art can understand that the hardware structure shown in FIG. 2A does not constitute a limitation on the mobile phone 200.
- the mobile phone 200 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined, or different components may be arranged. .
- the processor 201 is the control center of the mobile phone 200. It uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the mobile phone 200, and executes the mobile phone by running or executing application programs stored in the memory 203, and calling data and instructions stored in the memory 203. Various functions of 200 and processing data.
- the processor 201 may include one or more processing units; the processor 201 may further integrate an application processor and a baseband processor; wherein the application processor mainly processes an operating system, a user interface, and an application program, etc.
- the processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that the above-mentioned baseband processor may not be integrated into the processor 201.
- the processor 201 may be a Kirin 960 chip manufactured by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
- the processor 201 may further include a fingerprint verification chip for verifying the collected fingerprint.
- the processor 201 may further include an AI chip.
- the learning and processing capabilities of AI chips include image understanding, natural language understanding, and speech recognition.
- the AI chip can make the mobile phone 200 have better performance, longer battery life, and better security and privacy.
- the radio frequency circuit 202 may be used for receiving and transmitting wireless signals during information transmission and reception or during a call. Specifically, the radio frequency circuit 202 may receive the downlink data of the base station and process it to the processor 201; in addition, send the uplink data to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency circuit may include an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, the radio frequency circuit 202 can also communicate with other devices through wireless communication. Wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications, General Packet Radio Service, Code Division Multiple Access, Broadband Code Division Multiple Access, Long Term Evolution, Email, Short Message Service, and so on.
- the memory 203 is used to store application programs and data, and the processor 201 executes various functions and data processing of the mobile phone 200 by running the application programs and data stored in the memory 203.
- the memory 203 mainly includes a storage program area and a storage data area, wherein the storage program area can store an operating system and at least one application required by a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.); the storage data area can store data according to the use of the mobile phone Data created at 200 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
- the memory 203 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as a magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices.
- the memory 203 can store various operating systems, such as those developed by Apple Inc. Operating system, developed by Google Operating system, etc.
- the memory 203 stores application programs related to the embodiments of the present application, such as a taskcard store, Twitter, phone book, Weibo, or WeChat, etc.
- the memory 203 also stores information that can be related to the registration and login of the embodiments of the present application Information, such as username information.
- the touch screen 204 may include a touch-sensitive surface 204-1 and a display 204-2.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 (such as a touch panel) can capture touch events on or near the user of the mobile phone 200 (for example, the user uses a finger, a stylus, or any suitable object on the touch-sensitive surface 204-1). Or operations near the touch-sensitive surface 204-1), and send the collected touch information to other devices such as the processor 201.
- hovering touch can mean that the user does not need to select, move, or drag a target (such as an application (App) icon, etc.) ) And touch the touchpad directly, and the user only needs to be located near the mobile phone 200 in order to perform the desired function.
- a target such as an application (App) icon, etc.
- touchpad directly, and the user only needs to be located near the mobile phone 200 in order to perform the desired function.
- touch the terms "touch”, “contact”, and the like do not imply direct contact with the touch screen 204, but rather a contact near or close to it.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 capable of floating touch can be implemented using a capacitive type, an infrared light sensor, and an ultrasonic wave.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 may include a touch detection device and a touch controller.
- the touch detection device detects the user's touch position, and detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller;
- the touch controller receives touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into contact coordinates, and then When sent to the processor 201, the touch controller may also receive and execute instructions sent by the processor 201.
- various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves can be used to implement the touch-sensitive surface 204-1.
- the display (also referred to as a display screen) 204-2 may be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user and various menus of the mobile phone 200.
- the display 204-2 may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 may be overlaid on the display 204-2. When the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 detects a touch event on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 201 to determine the type of the touch event. 201 may provide corresponding visual output on the display 204-2 according to the type of touch event.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 and the display screen 204-2 are implemented as two separate components to implement the input and output functions of the mobile phone 200, in some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface 204- 1 Integrated with the display 204-2 to implement the input and output functions of the mobile phone 200.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 may cover the display 204-2, and the size of the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 may be larger than the size of the display screen 204-2, so that the display screen 204 -2 are all covered under the touch-sensitive surface 204-1, or the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 can be configured on the front of the mobile phone 200 in the form of a comprehensive board, that is, the user's touch on the front of the mobile phone 200 can be perceived by the mobile phone. This can achieve a full touch experience on the front of the phone.
- the touch-sensitive surface 204-1 is configured on the front of the mobile phone 200 in the form of a full board
- the display 204-2 may also be configured on the front of the mobile phone 200 in the form of a full board. Achieve frameless structure.
- the touch screen 204 may further include a series of pressure sensor arrays, which may enable the mobile phone to sense the pressure applied to the touch screen 204 by a touch event.
- the mobile phone 200 may further include a Bluetooth device 205 for implementing data exchange between the mobile phone 200 and other short-range electronic devices (such as a mobile phone, a smart watch, etc.).
- the Bluetooth device in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit or a Bluetooth chip.
- the mobile phone 200 may further include at least one sensor 206, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
- the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
- the ambient light sensor may adjust the brightness of the display of the touch screen 204 according to the brightness of the ambient light.
- the proximity sensor may darken the display when the mobile phone 200 is moved to the ear.
- an accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in various directions (usually three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary. It can be used to identify the attitude of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tap) and so on.
- the sensor 206 may further include a fingerprint sensor.
- a fingerprint sensor may be configured on the back of the mobile phone 200 (for example, below the rear camera), or a fingerprint sensor may be configured on the front of the mobile phone 200 (for example, below the touch screen 204).
- the fingerprint recognition function can also be implemented by configuring a fingerprint sensor in the touch screen 204, that is, the fingerprint sensor can be integrated with the touch screen 204 to implement the fingerprint recognition function of the mobile phone 200.
- the fingerprint sensor may be configured in the touch screen 204, may be a part of the touch screen 204, or may be configured in the touch screen 204 in other ways.
- the fingerprint sensor can also be implemented as a full-board fingerprint sensor.
- the touch screen 204 can be regarded as a panel that can be used for fingerprint collection at any position.
- the fingerprint sensor may send the collected fingerprint to the processor 201 so that the processor 201 processes the fingerprint (for example, fingerprint verification, etc.).
- the fingerprint sensor in the embodiments of the present application may use any type of sensing technology, including but not limited to optical, capacitive, piezoelectric, or ultrasonic sensing technologies.
- the mobile phone 200 other sensors such as a gyroscope, a barometer, a hygrometer, a thermometer, an infrared sensor, and the like may be configured, and details are not described herein.
- sensors such as a gyroscope, a barometer, a hygrometer, a thermometer, an infrared sensor, and the like may be configured, and details are not described herein.
- the wifi device 207 is used to provide the mobile phone 200 with network access that complies with wifi-related standard protocols.
- the mobile phone 200 can access the wifi access point through the wifi device 207 to help users send and receive email, browse web pages, and access streaming media. It provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
- the wifi device 207 can also be used as a wifi wireless access point, and can provide wifi network access for other electronic devices.
- the positioning device 208 is configured to provide a geographic location for the mobile phone 200. It can be understood that the positioning device 208 may specifically be a receiver of a positioning system such as a global positioning system (GPS) or a Beidou satellite navigation system. After receiving the geographical position sent by the positioning system, the positioning device 208 sends the information to the processor 201 for processing, or sends the information to the memory 203 for storage. In other embodiments, the positioning device 208 may be a receiver of assisted global positioning system (AGPS). AGPS is an operation mode for performing GPS positioning with the assistance of mobile assistance. It can use The signal of the base station and the GPS satellite signal can make the mobile phone 200 locate faster.
- AGPS assisted global positioning system
- the positioning device 208 can obtain positioning assistance through communication with an auxiliary positioning server (such as the positioning server of the mobile phone 200).
- the AGPS system assists the positioning device 208 to complete ranging and positioning services as an auxiliary server.
- the auxiliary positioning server communicates with the positioning device 208 (ie, the GPS receiver) of the mobile phone 200 through a wireless communication network to provide positioning assistance.
- the positioning device 208 may also be a positioning technology based on a wifi access point. Since each wifi access point has a globally unique MAC address, the mobile phone 200 can scan and collect the broadcast signals of the surrounding WIFI access points when the wifi is turned on, so it can get the broadcast from the wifi access point.
- the mobile phone 200 sends these data (eg, MAC address) that can indicate the wifi access point to the location server through the wireless communication network, and the location server retrieves the geographic location of each wifi access point, and combines the wifi broadcast signal with The degree of strength is calculated and sent to the positioning device 208 of the mobile phone 200.
- data eg, MAC address
- the audio circuit 209, the speaker 212, and the microphone 213 may provide an audio interface between the user and the mobile phone 200.
- the audio circuit 209 can transmit the received electrical data converted electrical signal to the speaker 212, and the speaker 212 converts the sound signal into an output signal.
- the microphone 213 converts the collected sound signal into an electrical signal, and the audio circuit 209 After receiving, it is converted into audio data, and then the audio data is output to the RF circuit 202 for sending to, for example, a mobile phone, or the audio data is output to the memory 203 for further processing.
- the peripheral interface 210 is used to provide various interfaces for external input / output devices (such as a keyboard, a mouse, an external display, an external memory, a user identification module card, etc.). For example, it is connected to a mouse through a universal serial bus interface, and connected to a subscriber identity module (SIM) card provided by a telecommunications operator through a metal contact on a card slot of the subscriber identity module.
- SIM subscriber identity module
- the peripheral interface 210 may be used to couple the above-mentioned external input / output peripherals to the processor 201 and the memory 203.
- the mobile phone 200 may further include a power supply system 211 (such as a battery and a power management chip) for supplying power to various components.
- the battery may be connected to the processor 201 through the power management chip, so as to implement the management of charging, discharging, and Features such as power management.
- the mobile phone 200 may further include a camera, for example, a front camera and a rear camera, wherein the front camera may be used to capture facial feature information, and the processor 201 may perform facial analysis on the facial feature information. Identify, and then proceed.
- the mobile phone 200 may further include a flash, a micro-projection device, a near field communication (NFC) device, and the like, and details are not described herein.
- NFC near field communication
- FIG. 2B provides a device that can be run in the electronic device.
- Software architecture diagram of the operating system The software architecture can be divided into four layers, namely the Applications layer, the Application Framework layer, the Libraries layer, and the Linux Kernel layer.
- the application layer is the level of interaction with the user in the Android system.
- the application layer includes various applications of the mobile phone, such as system applications such as settings, contacts, text messages, calls, photo galleries, calendars, browsers, or third-party applications such as WeChat and Youku.
- the application layer can access services provided by the application framework layer according to different applications. For example, when processing the icons displayed on the desktop, the icon processing application in the application layer can access the icon processing interface management service provided by the application framework layer.
- an application program is developed using the Java language and is completed by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by an application framework layer.
- API application programming interface
- the application framework layer mainly provides developers with access to various APIs used by the application.
- the application framework layer provides different APIs and services for the application layer.
- the application framework layer may provide an API related to the icon processing function for the application layer, and provide an icon processing interface management service for the application layer to implement the icon processing function.
- the application framework can be A series of service and management systems for operating systems.
- the application framework mainly includes the following basic services:
- Window Manager (Window Manager) module: It is used to manage the graphical user interface resources used on the screen, which can include: the creation and destruction of windows, the display and hiding of windows, the layout of windows, the management of focus, the input method and wallpaper management Wait.
- Activity Management used to manage the life cycle of each application.
- Applications usually run in the operating system as an Activity.
- ActivityRecord an application record corresponding to it in the Activity Manager, and this ActivityRecord records the activity state of the application.
- the activity manager can use this Activity record as an identifier to schedule the application's Activity process.
- Views A rich and extensible collection of views that can be used to build an application, which specifically include List, Grid, TextBox, Button, and embeddable web browsing Device.
- Notification Manager module It is used to control the application program to display prompt information (such as Alerts, Notifications, etc.) to the user in the status bar, lock screen, etc.
- prompt information such as Alerts, Notifications, etc.
- the application framework layer may further include an input management module, a group management module, an application management module, and the like.
- the modules cooperate with each other to implement the icon processing function.
- an input for instructing to start the icon processing function may be triggered.
- the input management module may be used to detect a user input event and notify the window management module of the input event.
- the input event may be a user's touch operation (such as click, double-click, two-finger click, long press, pressure press, pressure long press, drag, one-finger swipe, two-finger swipe or drag, etc.), hover Operations or voice input operations.
- the window management module can be specifically used to receive input events notified by the input management module, determine the associated elements (such as association icons or association groups) triggered by the input event, and process the business, and notify the activity management module to execute the associated element's processing business corresponding to the input event And update the view according to the notification from the activity management module.
- the activity management module can be specifically used to perform business processing on associated elements according to input events, construct new views according to business processing scenarios, and notify the window management module to update views.
- the application group information is obtained from the group management module, or the group management module is notified to update the application group information according to the business process.
- the group management module can be used to manage the group information of the application, such as the correspondence between the group and the icon, the position of the group on the desktop, and the position of the icon in the group.
- the application management module can be used to provide information about all applications in the system, such as providing application names and application icons.
- the function library layer is the support of the application framework and an important link between the application framework layer and the Linux kernel layer.
- the function library layer includes some function libraries compiled by the computer program C or C ++. These function libraries can be used by different components in the operating system. They provide services to developers through the application framework layer.
- the function library may include a libc function library, which is specially customized for embedded Linux-based devices; the function library may also include a multimedia library (Media Framework), which supports playback and recording of audio or video in multiple encoding formats , While supporting still image files, as well as common audio or video encoding formats.
- the function library also includes an interface management library (Surface Manager), which is mainly responsible for managing access to the display system. It is specifically used to manage the interaction between display and access operations when executing multiple applications. It is also responsible for 2D drawing and 3D. Drawings are composited for display.
- the function library layer may also include other function libraries for implementing various functions of the mobile phone, for example: scalable graphics library (SGL): 2D graphic images based on extensible markup language (XML) files Processing engine; secure sockets layer (SSL): located between TVP / IP protocol and various application layer protocols to provide support for data communication; three-dimensional graphics processing library (OpenGL / ES): support for 3D effects; lightweight Database (SQLite): Relational database engine; Webkit: Web browser engine; FreeType: Bitmap and vector font support; etc.
- SGL scalable graphics library
- XML extensible markup language
- SSL secure sockets layer
- OpenGL / ES three-dimensional graphics processing library
- SQL lightweight Database
- Webkit Web browser engine
- FreeType Bitmap and vector font support
- Android Runtime is a The operating environment on the operating system is A new type of virtual machine used by the operating system. In Android Runtime, AOT (Ahead-Of-Time) technology is used. When an application is first installed, the bytecode of the application is pre-compiled into machine code, making the application a real native application. , And then run it again, the compilation step is omitted, and startup and execution will become faster.
- AOT Ahead-Of-Time
- the Android Runtime may also be replaced by a core function library (Core Libraries) and a Dalvik virtual machine (Dalvik Virtual Machine).
- the core function library provides most of the functions of the Java language API, and mainly provides the interface of the underlying program library to the application framework layer through the Java native interface (JNI). It also includes some core APIs of the operating system, such as android.os, android.net, android.media, and so on.
- the Dalvik virtual machine uses a JIT (Just-in-Time) runtime compilation mechanism. Each time a process is started, the virtual machine needs to recompile the bytecode in the background, which will have a certain impact on the startup speed.
- JIT Just-in-Time
- Each application runs in an instance of a Dalvik virtual machine, and each Dalvik virtual machine instance is an independent process space.
- Dalvik virtual machines are designed to efficiently run multiple virtual machines on one device.
- Dalvik virtual machine executable file format is .dex, dex format is a compression format designed for Dalvik, suitable for systems with limited memory and processor speed.
- the Dalvik virtual machine relies on the Linux kernel to provide basic functions (threads, underlying memory management). It can be understood that Android Runtime and Dalvik belong to different types of virtual machines, and those skilled in the art can select different forms of virtual machines in different situations.
- the Linux kernel layer provides the core system services of the operating system, such as security, memory management, process management, network protocol stack, and driver model, etc., all based on the Linux kernel.
- the Linux kernel also acts as an abstraction layer between the hardware and software stacks. There are many drivers related to electronic devices in this layer.
- the main drivers are: display driver; Linux-based frame buffer driver; keyboard driver as input device; Flash driver based on memory technology device; camera driver; audio driver; Bluetooth driver ; Wi-Fi driver and so on.
- the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may be installed with one or more applications, and an icon of the application installed in the electronic device is displayed on a desktop displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device.
- the application in the embodiment of the present application may be an embedded application (that is, a system application of an electronic device) or a downloadable application.
- Embedded applications are applications that are provided as part of the implementation of an electronic device.
- the downloadable application may be an application program that can provide an Internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) connection.
- IMS Internet protocol multimedia subsystem
- the downloadable application may be an application that is pre-installed in an electronic device or may be downloaded and installed by the user in the electronic device. Third-party applications.
- the touch screen of the electronic device can display a page or a screen of the desktop.
- the desktop can include multiple pages or multiple screens. Among them, multiple elements can be displayed or placed on each page, and multiple elements can be displayed or placed on each screen.
- the element may be an icon, a group (for example, a folder) or a widget of an application.
- the electronic device may also store the correspondence between the icon of the application and the page and the correspondence between the icon and the group. The electronic device may determine which page and which group of the application icon are specifically displayed according to the above-mentioned correspondence.
- the electronic device can switch between different pages on the desktop.
- the icon of the application may also be called an application icon or simply an icon.
- GUIs displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device there are two GUIs displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device, and these GUIs may be one page or one screen of the electronic device.
- the GUI shown in FIG. 3 (a) may be referred to as the first page of the desktop 300, and the GUI shown in FIG. 3 (b) may be referred to as the second page of the desktop. 309.
- Each page may include different elements.
- the GUI may be the first page 300 in the desktop of the electronic device.
- the first page 300 may include a status bar 301, a hideable navigation bar 302, time and weather. Widgets, as well as multiple application icons and groups, such as WeChat icon 303, album icon 304, entertainment group 305, and tool group 306.
- the first page 300 shown in (a) of FIG. 3 may further include a Dock bar, and the Dock bar may include commonly used App icons, such as a call icon and a text message icon. Or contact icon.
- the icon in the Dock column can be understood as not changing when the user switches pages.
- Figure 3 (b) the user switches from Figure 3 (a) to Figure 3 (b), and Figure 3 (b) still shows the Dock bar.
- Icon such as a call icon, text message icon, or contact icon.
- Each group may include multiple icons, for example, the entertainment group 305 may include a Sohu video icon 307, a vibrato icon, a quick hand icon, a tiger tooth icon, and the like.
- the status bar 301 may include the name of the operator (such as China Mobile), time, wifi icon, signal strength, or current remaining power.
- the navigation bar 302 may include a back button 308, a home button 314, and a history task button. The navigation bar 302 may be located in the display screen or outside the display screen.
- the navigation bar 302 When the navigation bar 302 is located in the display screen, the navigation bar 302 may be transparent, or the navigation bar 302 may be hidden based on a user's trigger or a preset time.
- the status bar 301 may further include a Bluetooth icon, a mobile network icon (for example, a 4G icon), an alarm clock icon, an external device icon, and the like.
- the home screen key can be a physical key or a virtual key.
- the user can return the GUI displayed on the touch screen to the home screen or home page by clicking the home screen key.
- the home screen or home page is one of multiple pages on the desktop.
- the home screen key may also integrate a fingerprint sensor, so that when the user presses the home screen key, the electronic device performs fingerprint collection to confirm the identity of the user, or the user The finger is located on the home screen key, and the fingerprint can be collected when the home screen key is not pressed.
- the GUI shown in (b) of FIG. 3 may be a second page 309 in the desktop of the electronic device.
- the second page 309 includes an audio and video group 310 and a shopping group 311, and an ungrouped LeTV video icon 312 and micro Bo icon 313 and so on.
- the video and audio group 310 and the shopping group 311 are in the form of thumbnails.
- the electronic device After the electronic device detects an operation of the user swiping to the left in the first page 300 shown in FIG. 3 (a), as shown in FIG. 3 (b), the electronic device may switch to display the second page 309. In addition, when the electronic device detects an operation of the user swiping to the right in the second page 309 shown in FIG. 3 (b), the electronic device may switch to display the second page 309.
- GUI graphical user interface
- the page on the desktop can also include a negative screen, and elements can also be displayed on the negative screen, such as the icon of an application installed in an electronic device.
- the negative screen can display applications commonly used by users. icon.
- the negative screen may refer to an interface that the user swipes from the home screen to the right, or an interface that the user swipes to the right from the lock screen interface.
- an electronic device such as a mobile phone or a tablet computer having the foregoing hardware and software structure.
- an electronic device is a mobile phone and a group is a folder.
- a group is a folder.
- both the first group and the second group may be folders.
- An embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method. Based on the first page 300 and the second page 309 of the desktop shown in FIG. 3, the specific execution process of the icon switching method can be seen in FIGS. 4A-15.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the entertainment group 305 in the first page 300 shown in (a) of FIG. 3, as shown in (a) of FIG. 4A, the electronic device displays the opened entertainment group 305 and the entertainment group 305 includes a vibrato icon, a quick hand icon, a tiger tooth icon, and a Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a), it triggers the activation (or selection) of the Sohu video icon 307 and displays (b) in FIG.
- the pressure can be understood as the user pressing the Sohu video icon 307, and the pressure value can be greater than or equal to a preset pressure threshold.
- the electronic device may activate the icon and may display a grouping interface (such as the grouping interface shown in (b) in FIG. 4A). It can be understood that the pressing force of the click operation may be less than a preset pressure threshold. Similar to the pressure operation, there is also a pressure long press. A long press means that the user presses more than or equal to a preset pressure threshold, and the duration of the press is greater than or equal to a preset time threshold.
- the grouping interface 401 includes groups other than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop, that is, the group to which the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 can be switched, such as a tool group 306, a video group 310, and a shopping group 311. That is, when the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a), the electronic device updates the interface displaying the opened entertainment group 305 to display the desktop A grouping interface 401 for groups other than the entertainment group 305 on the page.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the target group of audio and video group 310 shown in (b) of FIG. 4A, the electronic device is triggered to display a check mark 402 on the audio and video group 310 and classify the Sohu video icon 307 into the audio and video group 310. . At this time, the electronic device displays the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310.
- the thumbnail of the audiovisual group 310 includes Sohu video Icon 307.
- the electronic device displays the opened audio / video group 310, and the audio / video group 310 includes the iQiyi video icon , Tencent video icon, Youku video icon, and Sohu video icon 307. At this time, the Sohu video icon 307 is no longer included in the entertainment group 305.
- the electronic device may automatically display the opened audio / video group. 310.
- the Sohu video icon 307 enters the audio and video group 310.
- the audio and video group 310 includes iQiyi video icon, Tencent video icon, Youku video icon, and Sohu video icon 307.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is located at the position of the last icon in the bottom row of the audio / video group 310 ;
- the Sohu video icon 307 is the first icon in the top row of the audio and video group 310; in another implementation, the position of the Sohu video icon 307 in the application group 310 may be an electronic device Randomly set.
- multiple groups in the grouping interface 401 may be arranged in order of priority.
- the priority of the audio and video group 310 and the shopping group 311 on the second page is higher than the priority of the tool group 306 on the first page.
- a group having a strong correlation with an activated icon has a higher priority.
- the audio / video group 310 is strongly associated with the activated Sohu video icon 307, so the first group in the top row displayed in the grouping interface 401 may be the audio / video group 310.
- a packet frequently used by a user for example, a packet frequently used therein is frequently used
- the shopping group 311 is a group frequently used by users, so the first group in the top row displayed in the grouping interface 401 may be the shopping group 311.
- the user does not need to drag the Sohu video icon 307 to cut the screen (that is, switch the page on the desktop), so that the Sohu video icon 307 can be grouped from the entertainment group 305 in the first page 300
- Switching to the video and audio grouping 310 of the second page 309 enables the cross-screen (ie, cross-page) switching grouping of the Sohu video icon 307, so the operation is simpler.
- the group switching process described in FIG. 4A is described by taking the user-selected target group, that is, the audio / video group 310 and the entertainment group 305 where the Sohu video icon 307 is located as an example.
- the electronic device may also switch the Sohu video icon 307 to another group located on the same page (ie, the first page 300) as the group where the Sohu video icon 307 is located by using the group switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application. For example, the Sohu video icon 307 is switched to the tool group 306, and the process of switching the group is not described here.
- the electronic device may display the page on which the target group is located, that is, display the second page 309 on which the audiovisual group 310 is located.
- the thumbnail of the video and audio group 310 on the second page 309 includes the Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device detects the operation of the user clicking the home screen key 314, as shown in FIG. 4B As shown in (b), the electronic device displays a home screen, that is, the electronic device displays a first page 300. At this time, the thumbnail of the entertainment group 305 on the first page 300 no longer includes the Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device After the Sohu video icon is switched to the audio and video group 310, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310, the electronic device may open the Sohu video application interface corresponding to the Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device can also trigger the activation of the Sohu video icon 307 and display the group interface 401 when it detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305; or, as shown in FIG.
- the electronic device may also trigger the activation of the Sohu video icon 307 and display the group interface 401 when detecting that the user has drawn a circle gesture at the position of the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305. It can be understood that there are various operations for triggering the activation of the Sohu video icon 307 and displaying the grouping interface 401, for example, the user double-clicks the Sohu video icon 307 or two fingers clicks the Sohu video icon 307, etc., which are not listed here one by one.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed in (b) of FIG. 4A by the electronic device may be replaced with the grouping interface 601 shown in (a) of FIG. 6.
- the grouping interface 601 may include all the groups on each page on the desktop, and specifically includes an entertainment group 305, a tool group 306, a video group 310, and a shopping group 311.
- the activated Sohu video icon 307 is not displayed in the entertainment group 305 shown in FIG. 6 (a), and the Sohu video icon 307 is not displayed in the audio and video group 310.
- the Sohu video icon 307 enters the audio and video group 310.
- the entertainment group 305 shown in (a) of FIG. 6 shows the activated Sohu video icon 307, and after the user clicks on the audio and video group 310 shown in FIG. 6 (a), the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 disappears, and the electronic device displays the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed in (b) of FIG. 4A by the electronic device may be replaced with another grouping interface, which includes the desktop and the activated Sohu video icon on the other grouping interface.
- Entertainment group 305 where 307 is located is not in all other groups on the same page.
- the selection mark 402 may also be replaced with the selection mark 602 shown in (b) of FIG. 6, Or a check mark 603 as shown in (c) of FIG. 6.
- the user may also select multiple target groups. For example, as shown in (d) of FIG. 6, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks to select the audio / video group 310 and the tool group 306, the activated Sohu video icon 307 enters the audio / video group 310 and the tool group 306.
- the video and audio group 310 includes the Sohu video icon 307
- the tool group 306 also includes the Sohu video icon 307
- the entertainment group 305 does not include the Sohu video icon 307, that is, the Sohu video icon 307 switches from the entertainment group 305 to the audio and video group 310 And tools in group 306. That is, the electronic device can switch the icons in one group to multiple other groups at the same time.
- the plurality of other groups may include a group located on the same page as the group, or may include a group located on a different page from the group.
- the user may also activate multiple icons in the group.
- the electronic device displays the opened entertainment group 305, as shown in (a) of FIG. 7, when the electronic device detects a user's trigger operation (such as clicking a blank position in the entertainment group 305, or long When any one of the icons in the entertainment group 305 is pressed), the icons in the entertainment group 305 are triggered to enter a standby state. As shown in (b) of FIG.
- the electronic device can display the grouping interface, for example, the grouping interface 401 or Group interface 601, and then use the method described in the above embodiment to switch Sohu video icon 307 and Huya icon 700 to other groups together.
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks the audio / video group 310 in the group interface 401, as shown in FIG. 8 (a)
- the Sohu video icon 307 and the tiger tooth icon 700 enter the audio / video group 310 and the entertainment group 305 Sohu video icon 307 and Huya icon 700 may no longer be included.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the user clicks the thumbnail of the audiovisual group 310 shown in FIG. 8 (a), as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the electronic device displays the opened audiovisual group 310, that is, the electronic device enlarges and displays the audiovisual group. Group 310.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 901 shown in (a) of FIG. 9.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a)
- the Sohu video icon 307 is triggered to be activated, and the opened entertainment group is displayed above the group interface 901. 305. All groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop are displayed below the group interface 901.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is triggered to enter the audio / video group 310, as shown in (c) of FIG. 9, the audio / video group 310
- the thumbnail of 310 includes the Sohu video icon 307, and the entertainment group 305 no longer includes the Sohu video icon 307.
- the audio and video group 310 includes Sohu video Icon 307; in another case, as shown in (d) of FIG. 9, the electronic device directly displays the opened audio and video group 310, and the Sohu video icon 307 is located in the audio and video group 310.
- the electronic device displays the grouping interface 901
- the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the video and audio group 310
- the Sohu video icon 307 is triggered to enter the video and audio group 310
- the Sohu video icon 307 is displayed in the thumbnail of the audio and video group 310.
- the electronic device automatically displays the opened Audio and video group 310, Sohu video icon 307 is located at the last group (or the first group in the top row) of the audio and video group 310; in another case, the electronic device automatically displays the opened audio and video group 310 As shown in (e) and (f) of FIG.
- the electronic device detects the position of the icon when the user stops dragging, and according to the The location sets the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310, and automatically arranges other icons in the audio and video group 310.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 1001 shown in (a) of FIG. 10.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 shown in FIG. 4A (a)
- the Sohu video icon 307 may be activated and the Sohu video icon 307 is displayed on the grouping interface 1001.
- all other groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop hide other icons other than the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 and the entertainment group 305.
- the Sohu video icon 307 and the group on each page of the desktop can also be displayed on the group interface 1001, including the entertainment group 305.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 1101 shown in (a) of FIG. 11.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a)
- the electronic device displays the entertainment group 305 above the group interface 1101, and displays the entertainment group 305 on the group interface 1101.
- the thumbnails of the pages on the desktop are displayed below.
- the thumbnails of each page include the groups and icons included on the current page.
- the grouping interface 1101 includes a thumbnail 1102 of a first page and a thumbnail 1103 of a second page.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the thumbnail position 1103 of the second page, the electronic device enlarges and displays the second page 309.
- the Sohu video icon 307 enters the video and audio group 310 and the video and audio group 310 thumbnails.
- the electronic device automatically displays the opened audio and video group 310, and the audio and video group 310 includes Sohu video icon 307. At this time, the Sohu video icon 307 is no longer included in the entertainment group 305.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the thumbnail 1103 of the second page, the electronic device enlarges and displays the interface of the second page 309.
- the electronic device may automatically display the opened audio and video group 310.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is located in the audio / video group 310.
- the electronic device detects the position of the icon when the user stops dragging, and according to the position, a Sohu video icon 307 can be set in the audio / video group 310, and other icons in the audio / video group 310 can be automatically arranged.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 1201 shown in (a) of FIG. 12.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a)
- the electronic device displays the entertainment group 305 above the grouping interface 1201, and displays the entertainment group 305 on the grouping interface 1201.
- a part of the other groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop is shown below.
- the electronic device detects that the user swipes left or right on the grouping interface 1201 the grouping displayed below the grouping interface 1201 is switched, and the grouping interface 1202 is displayed.
- the entertainment group 305 is still displayed above the grouping interface 1202, and the grouping displayed below the grouping interface 1202 includes other groups not shown in the grouping interface 1201. It can be understood that the group displayed below the group interface 1202 may also include an entertainment group 305.
- the grouping interface 1202 displayed by the electronic device includes a grouping interface.
- the Sohu video icon 307 switches from the entertainment group 305 to the audio / video group 310.
- multiple groups in the grouping interface 1201 shown in (a) of FIG. 12 are described by arranging left and right as an example. In other embodiments, multiple groups in the grouping interface 1201 may also be Arranged up and down, when the user swipes up or down, the electronic device switches to display other groups.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 1301 shown in (a) or (c) of FIG. 13.
- the electronic device detects that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in FIG. 4A (a)
- the electronic device displays an opened group in the group interface 1301, and the group is a desktop group.
- a group other than the entertainment group 305 on the page, for example, the group is a tool group 306.
- the electronic device detects the operation of switching the group by the user, it switches to display another opened group on the group interface.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user slides to the left on the grouping interface 1301 shown in (a) of FIG. 13, the electronic device switches the display tool group 306 to display the audiovisual group 310.
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks the OK button in (b) of FIG. 13, the Sohu video icon 307 switches from the entertainment group 305 to the audio and video group 310.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user swipes left, the electronic device switches to display the next group; when the user swipes right, the electronic device switches to display the previous group (i.e., tool group 306) .
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user clicks the next button in the grouping interface 1301 shown in (c) in FIG. 13, the electronic device switches the display tool group 306 to display the audiovisual group 310.
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks the OK button in (d) of FIG. 13, the Sohu video icon 307 switches from the entertainment group 305 to the audio and video group 310.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user clicks the “Next” button, the electronic device switches to display the next group; when the user clicks the “Previous” button, the electronic device switches to display the previous group. (I.e. tool grouping 306).
- the icon processing process described in the above FIG. 4A to FIG. 13 is described by using the activated icon as the Sohu video icon 307 in the desktop group. It can be understood that the icon processing process described in the above FIG. 4A to FIG. 13 can also be used. Switch any activated icon in any group of the desktop to another already created group, which will not be described here.
- the grouping interface 401 displayed by the electronic device in (b) of FIG. 4A may be replaced with the grouping interface 1401 shown in (a) or (d) of FIG. 14A.
- the grouping interface 1401 may include all other groups except the entertainment grouping 305 on each page of the desktop, as well as uncategorized icons on each page of the desktop; or, the grouping interface 1401 may include desktop groups. All groups on the page, as well as uncategorized icons on each page of the desktop. Among them, the unclassified icon refers to an icon that is directly placed on the desktop and is not divided into any group.
- triggering the activation of the Sohu video icon 307 will display the interface update of the opened entertainment group 305
- display the grouping interface 1401 and to display on the grouping interface 1401 shown in (a) of FIG. 14A all other groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop, and the unclassified icons on each page of the desktop, display Tools group 306, shopping group 311, and audio and video group 310, as well as unclassified LeTV video icons 312, QQ icons, stock icons, and so on.
- the grouping interface 1401 may display a prompt message “Please select a target element”, and the target element may refer to a target group or a target unclassified icon.
- the electronic device detects that the user selects the target unclassified LeTV video icon 312 shown in (a) of FIG. 14A, the electronic device combines the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new group.
- the electronic device displays a Sohu video icon 307 and a LeTV video icon 312 in a new group 1402.
- the electronic device can display a thumbnail of the new group 1402; in another case, as shown in (c) of FIG. 14A, the electronic device can The new group 1402 after opening is displayed.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is triggered to be activated, as shown in FIG. 14A (d).
- the displayed group interface 1401 displays the Sohu video icon 307 above, hides the entertainment group icon 305 and other icons in the entertainment group 305, and displays all other groups except the entertainment group on each page of the desktop and the desktop below the group interface 1401.
- the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the LeTV video icon 312 in the grouping interface 1401 shown in FIG.
- the electronic device determines that the user has selected the LeTV video icon 312 and the LeTV video icon 312 As the target unclassified icon, as shown in (b) or (c) in FIG. 14A, the electronic device combines the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new group 1402.
- the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit which page of the new group 1402 is set on the desktop.
- the electronic devices shown in (b) or (c) of FIG. 14A form a new group 1402
- the electronic device detects an operation of the user clicking the return key 308 in one implementation, as shown in FIG. 14B
- the electronic device displays a new group 1402 on the second page 309 where the LeTV video icon 312 is located.
- the new group 1402 includes the LeTV video icon 312 and the Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device displays a new group 1402 on the first page 300 where the Sohu video icon 307 is located.
- the electronic device is on a preset page. Display new grouping 1402; in another implementation, the electronic device displays the new grouping on a page on the far right of the desktop; in another implementation, the electronic device is in a free area (not grouped, icon, or A new grouping 1402 is displayed on the page with the largest area occupied by the widget.
- the user does not need to drag the Sohu video icon 307 to cut the screen (that is, switch the page on the desktop), so that the Sohu video icon in the entertainment group 305 on the first page 300 can be 307 and the unclassified LeTV video icon 312 on the second page 309 are combined into a new group across screens, so the operation is simpler.
- the target selected by the user is an unclassified icon, that is, the LeTV video icon 312, and the entertainment group 305 where the Sohu video icon 307 is located is not on the same page.
- the electronic device may also combine the uncategorized icon on the same page (ie, the first page 300) with the Sohu video icon 307 as described in FIG. 14A into a new group. For example, the Sohu video icon 307 and the WeChat icon 303 on the first page 300 are combined into a new group, and the grouping process will not be repeated here.
- FIG. 14A is based on the user selecting an unclassified icon in the grouping interface 1401 (ie, LeTV video icon 312) as an example.
- the electronic device detects that the user selects multiple unclassified icons in the grouping interface 1401 At this time, the electronic device combines the Sohu video icon 307 and a plurality of unclassified icons selected by the user into a new group, and the electronic device displays the Sohu video icon 307 and the selected unclassified icons in the new group.
- the grouping interface 1401 may be replaced with the grouping interface 1403 shown in (a) of FIG. 14C; referring to (b) of FIG.
- the electronic device when the user selects LeTV video on the grouping interface 1403 When the icon 312 and the album icon 304, the electronic device combines the Sohu video icon 307, the LeTV video icon 312 and the album icon 304 selected by the user into a new group 1404. See (c) in FIG. 14C. The Sohu video icon 307, the LeTV video icon 312, and the album icon 304 are displayed in the group 1404.
- the electronic device may reduce the elements on the display grouping interface to display all the elements to be displayed on one interface as much as possible.
- the electronic device may be as shown in FIG.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects the user's swipe up operation in the grouping interface 1501, as shown in (b) of FIG. 15, the electronic device can display the grouping interface 1501 in the grouping interface 1502. Undisplayed elements, such as Weibo icon, Baidu icon, and LeTV video icon.
- Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, and an icon in one group can be switched to another group by setting a group control.
- another group may be an already-created group or a newly-created group.
- the electronic device may be triggered to display a menu list as shown in (b) of FIG. 16A.
- the menu list includes a change group control 1601, a share control, and an uninstall control.
- the share control is used to share an application
- the uninstall control is used to uninstall an application
- the change group control 1601 is to set a group control.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the sharing control, the user can share the Sohu video application to others through an application such as WeChat or through a network connection such as wifi; when the electronic device detects that the user will drag the Sohu video icon 307 When you drag to the position of the uninstall control, the electronic device can uninstall the Sohu video application. Understandably, when an icon, such as the Sohu video icon 307, is activated, the electronic device can be triggered to display the setting group control, such as the change group control in FIG. 16A (b).
- the setting group control such as the change group control in FIG. 16A (b).
- control may be a software component, which is contained in the application program and controls the data processed by the application program and the interactive operations on the data.
- the user can interact with the control through direct manipulation to direct the application program.
- controls can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface units.
- the triggering electronic device can hide the Sohu video icon 307 from the entertainment group 305
- a Sohu video icon 307 and a group other than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop are displayed on the group interface 1602 shown in (d) of FIG. 16A.
- the electronic device detects that the user has not let go after the dragging process shown in (c) in FIG. 16A, and continuously drags the Sohu video icon 307 into the audio / video group 310, such as As shown in (f) in FIG. 16A, the Sohu video icon 307 enters the audio / video group 310. At this time, the Sohu video icon 307 is no longer included in the entertainment group 305.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the change group control 1601, the electronic device is triggered in the position shown in (d) of FIG. 16A.
- the illustrated group interface 1602 displays a Sohu video icon 307 and other groups other than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop.
- the electronic device hides the Sohu icon 307, and the grouping in the grouping interface is in a standby state. As shown in (b) in FIG.
- the electronic device may further display the Sohu video icon in the audio and video group 310 by using the display manner described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 15 described above.
- the thumbnail of the audiovisual group 310 includes a Sohu video icon 307.
- the electronic device may directly The opened audio and video group 310 is displayed, and the audio and video group 310 includes a Sohu video icon 307.
- the setting group control can also be located at other positions of the interface, for example, at the bottom of the screen, or to the right of the activated icon, and so on.
- the electronic device detects that the user activates the Sohu video icon 307 by pressing the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 under pressure and other operations, as shown in (a) of FIG. 17, the electronic device is in the Sohu video icon 307 A menu list is displayed on the right side of the menu list, including the change grouping control 1701.
- the electronic device detects that the user activates the Sohu video icon 307 by pressing the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 under pressure as shown in FIG.
- the electronic device displays a floating ball In 1702, the floating ball 1702 is a group control.
- the electronic device may display a grouping interface 1602, which may be the interface shown in (d) of FIG. 16A or (a of FIG. 16B) ).
- the grouping interface 1602 may also be combined with the grouping interface 401, the grouping interface 601, the grouping interface 901, the grouping interface 1001, the grouping interface 1101, the grouping interface 1201, and the grouping interface 401, grouping interface 601, grouping interface 601 described in FIGS. 4A-15.
- the interface 1301, the grouping interface 1401, the grouping interface 1501, or the grouping interface 1601 are the same.
- the group interface 1602 is the group interface 401, after the electronic device detects that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 to the change group 1601, all other pages on the desktop page except the entertainment group 305 can be displayed in the group interface 401 Grouping.
- the user may select a target group by using the related operations described in FIGS. 4A to 15 for different grouping interfaces, so that the activated icon enters the target group.
- the grouping interface 1602 is the grouping interface 901 shown in (a) of FIG. 9
- the user can select the video and audio group 310 as the target group by clicking the video and audio group 310 and clicking the OK button, so as to activate the Sohu video.
- the icon 307 is grouped into the audiovisual group 310.
- the grouping interface 1602 is the grouping interface 901 shown in FIG.
- the user can select the video and audio group 310 as the target group by dragging the Sohu video icon 307 to the position of the video and audio group 310, and the target group will be
- the activated Sohu video icon 307 is grouped into the audio and video group 310.
- the grouping interface 1602 may also include unclassified icons on each page of the desktop.
- the electronic device detects that the user selects an unclassified icon on the grouping interface 1602
- the electronic device merges the activated icon and the unclassified icon selected on the grouping interface 1602 into a new group.
- the grouping interface 1602 may specifically be the grouping interface 1401 shown in (a) of FIG. 14A.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the user selects the unclassified LeEco video icon 312 shown in the grouping interface 1402, the target is not When sorting icons, the electronic device combines the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new group 1402, and the electronic device displays the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 in the new group 1402.
- the setting grouping control may also be a buffer.
- the user can trigger the display of the grouping interface 1602 by dragging at least one activated icon to the buffer.
- the user can drag each activated icon in the buffer to the position of the corresponding target element (including the target group or target unclassified icon) respectively; or , The user can also drag multiple activated icons in the buffer area to the location of the target element to switch the activated icon to the target group, or merge the activated icon and the target unclassified icon into a new group.
- the grouping interface 1602 is different from the grouping interfaces described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 15 described above in that the grouping interface 1602 includes the content on the grouping interfaces described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 15 described above. This buffer is also included.
- the change grouping control 1601 in (a) of FIG. 16A may be replaced with a buffer 1801 shown in (a) of FIG. 18.
- the group interface 1602 is triggered to be displayed.
- the group interface 1602 may specifically It is a grouping interface 1802 shown in (c) in FIG. 18. As shown in FIG.
- FIG. 16A to FIG. 18 in the embodiment of the present application are mainly described by using the Sohu video icon 307 in the desktop group as an example.
- a group control is used to switch to another group.
- FIG. 19 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 19, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page.
- the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the first page may be the interface 301 shown in (a) of FIG. 3
- the first group may be the entertainment group 305 in the interface 301 shown in (a) of FIG. 3
- the first application icon may be It is a Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in (a) of FIG. 3.
- the electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the user's operation on the first group may be a user's click operation on the first group.
- the opened first group may be the opened entertainment group 305 as shown in (a) of FIG. 4A.
- the electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- the operation performed by the user on the first application icon in the opened first group may be a long-press operation on the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305, or an entertainment operation as shown in (a) of FIG. 16A Press the operation of the Sohu video icon 307 in the group 305, or shake the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 as shown in (a) of FIG. 5, or as shown in (b) of FIG. 5 Of users draw gestures such as a circle in the position of the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305.
- the setting group control may be a change group control 1601 as shown in (b) of FIG. 16A; or it may be a change group control 1701 as shown in (a) of FIG. 17; or, it may be as shown in FIG. 17 (a);
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 16A (c).
- the grouping interface may be the interface 1602 shown in (d) of FIG. 16A, or the grouping interface 1401 shown in (d) of FIG. 14A, and the like.
- the electronic device responds to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second For the operation of two groups, the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the grouping interface is the interface shown in (d) in FIG. 16A.
- the user continues to drag the Sohu video icon The operation from 307 to the position of the audio / video packet 310 (ie, the second packet).
- the Sohu video icon 307 is located in the audio / video group 310.
- the grouping interface is the interface shown in (d) of FIG. 14A.
- the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon may be the operation shown in FIG. 14A.
- the user continues to drag the Sohu video icon 307 to The operation of the position of the LeTV video icon 312 (that is, the second application icon).
- the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group 1402, that is, the Sohu video icon 307 switches to the new group 1402.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the position of the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface to form A new group, thereby switching the first application icon into the new group.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, which may include: the electronic device responds to the user The operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the operation is performed in the second group according to the target position The first application icon is displayed. In this way, the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
- the second group may be the audio and video group 310
- the first application icon may be the Sohu video icon 307
- the electronic device responds to the user ’s operation of dragging the Sohu video icon 307 to the target position in the audio and video group 310 according to the target position
- the process of displaying the Sohu video icon 307 in the video and audio group 310 refer to the processes shown in (e) and (f) in FIG. 9.
- FIG. 20 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 20, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page.
- the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- steps 2001-2003 For the description of steps 2001-2003, refer to the descriptions in steps 1901-1903 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the electronic device responds to the user dragging the first application icon to the set group control, and displays a group interface.
- the group interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
- FIG. 16A c
- the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 (that is, the first application icon) to the change grouping control 1601 (that is, setting the grouping control). Controls).
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, or an interface 1401 as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A, or an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 4A, Either the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (b) in FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (a) in FIG. 10 or (a) in FIG. 11 ), Or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 12, or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 13, or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 14C, or The interface and the like shown in (d) of FIG. 18.
- the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, and the operation of the user on the second group is as shown in (b) of FIG. 16B, the user clicks on the audio / video group 310 (ie, the second group) and Click the OK button.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is located in the audio / video group 310.
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A
- the operation of the second application icon by the user is as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A, when the user clicks the LeTV video icon 312 (that is, the second Application icon).
- the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group.
- the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can easily switch the first application icon in the first grouping to the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface.
- the two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon by the user to set the grouping control, and the element in the grouping interface is in a standby state. In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
- a blank selection box is displayed in the lower right corner of all the groups in the grouping interface to indicate that these groups are in a candidate state.
- FIG. 21 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 21, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page.
- the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
- the electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
- the electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
- steps 2101-2103 For the description of steps 2101-2103, refer to the descriptions in steps 1901-1903 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user operation for setting a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the operation of the user to set the grouping control may be, as shown in (a) of FIG. 17, the user's click operation on changing the grouping control 1701 (ie, setting the grouping control); or, as shown in (b) of FIG. 17 ),
- the user drags the setting group hoverball 1702 (that is, the setting group control) to the position of the Sohu video icon 307 (that is, the first application icon), and the like.
- the grouping interface may be the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, or the interface shown in (d) of FIG. 18, or the interface shown in (c) of FIG. 4A, or The interface shown in (a) of FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 10 or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 11
- the interface shown in FIG. 12 is as shown in FIG. 12 (a), or as shown in FIG. 13 (a), or as shown in FIG. 14A (a), or as shown in FIG. 14C. (A), etc.
- the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
- the grouping interface may be the interface 1401 shown in (a) of FIG. 14A
- the second application icon may be the LeTV video icon 312 shown in (a) of FIG. 14A.
- the user ’s operation of the second application icon It may be an operation that the user clicks the LeTV video icon 312 as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A.
- the Sohu video icon 307 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group 1402.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B
- the second grouping may be an audio / video grouping 310 as shown in (b) of FIG. 16B.
- the operation of the second grouping by the user may be as shown in FIG.
- the Sohu video icon 307 is located in the audio / video group 310.
- the first application icon by operating the first application icon in the first group, the first application icon can be activated and the grouping control is displayed.
- the electronic device By operating the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the group interface, or facilitates the user to create a new one composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the group interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
- the grouping interface may include other groups on the desktop except the first group.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (b) of FIG. 4A, and the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop except the entertainment group 305 (ie, the first group).
- the grouping interface may include other groups on the desktop other than the first group and application icons on the desktop.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A.
- the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the entertainment group 305 (ie, the first group) and application icons on the desktop.
- Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can classify activated unclassified icons (not in a group) on the desktop into an already created group, or group activated unclassified icons on the desktop with Other uncategorized icons are merged into a new group.
- the execution process of this method is similar to the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18 above, except that the activated icon is not in the group but directly on the desktop, so the user does not need to open the group and then activate the icon. You can activate the icon directly on the desktop to trigger the display of the grouping interface.
- the user does not need to activate the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 after opening the entertainment group 305 on the desktop, but can activate an unclassified icon directly on the desktop .
- the other operation flows in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application are the same as the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18 described above, and reference may be made to the specific description above.
- the electronic device can also group activated unclassified icons into an already created group by setting a group control.
- the first page 300 of the desktop includes an uncategorized card package icon 2201.
- the electronic device detects the pressure of the user and presses the card package icon 2201 on the first page 300 (or detects that the user activates the card package icon 2201 through other operations), the electronic device is triggered to display the setting group control on the basis of the first page 300,
- the setting grouping control may specifically be a merge to grouping control 2202 shown in FIG. 22 (b). In one case, referring to (b) in FIG.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card pack icon 2201 to the position merged into the grouping control 2202, the electronic device may automatically display (c) in FIG. 22 The grouping interface shown.
- the electronic device detects that the user continues to drag the card package icon 2201 to the position of the shopping group 311, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card package icon 2201 enters the shopping group 311. At this time, the card package icon 2201 is no longer displayed directly on the desktop.
- directly displaying the card package icon 2201 means that the card package icon 2201 is displayed on a desktop page, instead of displaying the card package icon 2201 in a grouped thumbnail displayed on the page.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 to the position merged into the group control 2202 and releases it, the electronic device displays as shown in FIG. 22 (e ).
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks and selects the shopping group 311 on the group interface, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card package icon 2201 enters the shopping group 311. At this time, the card package icon 2201 is no longer displayed directly on the desktop.
- the setting grouping control may specifically be the merge into grouping control shown in (f) of FIG. 22.
- the electronic device may display the location as shown in (e) of FIG. 22.
- the grouping interface shown below.
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks and selects the shopping group 311 on the group interface, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card package icon 2201 enters the shopping group 311. At this time, the card package icon 2201 is no longer displayed directly on the desktop.
- grouping interface in the embodiment of the present application may also be other types of grouping interfaces described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18, and details are not described herein again.
- the user does not need to drag the icon 2201 to cut the screen (that is, to switch the page of the desktop), and the card package icon 2201 on the first page 300 can be classified into the shopping group 311 on the other page of the desktop to realize the Category icons are grouped across screens, so users ’operations are simpler.
- the electronic device may also combine the activated unclassified icon with another unclassified icon into a new group by setting a grouping control.
- the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the position where it is merged into the group control 2202, the electronic device displays the information shown in (a) of FIG. 23 Grouping interface, when the electronic device detects that the user keeps dragging the card package icon 2201 to the position of the LeTV video icon 312, see FIG. 23 (b), the electronic device merges the card package icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new Group 2301.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the position where it is merged into the grouping control 2202 and releases it, the electronic device may display an image as shown in FIG. 23
- the grouping interface shown in (c) when the electronic device detects the operation of the user clicking the LeTV video icon 312, referring to (b) in FIG. 23, the electronic device merges the card package icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new group 2301.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the user clicks and merges into a grouping control on the interface shown in FIG. 22 (f), the electronic device displays the grouping interface shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and when the electronic device When an operation of the user clicking the LeTV video icon 312 is detected, referring to (b) in FIG. 23, the electronic device merges the card package icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 into a new group 2301.
- the user does not need to drag the card package icon 2201 to cut the screen (that is, switch the page of the desktop), and can merge the card package icon 2201 on the first page 300 and the LeTV video icon 312 on another page of the desktop into
- the new grouping enables the multi-screen grouping of multiple unclassified icons on the desktop, so the user's operation is simpler.
- FIG. 22 to FIG. 23 in the embodiment of the present application are mainly described by using an uncategorized card package icon 2201 on the desktop as an example.
- an uncategorized card package icon 2201 on the desktop For any other activated unclassified icon on any page of the desktop, switch to another page.
- grouping process reference may be made to the processing of the card package icon 2201 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein.
- the activated unclassified icon on the desktop falls into the created group or merges with other unclassified icons into a new group, the activated unclassified icon is no longer directly displayed on the desktop, and the activated icon is displayed in the group. And the electronic device can also automatically rearrange the groups and icons on the desktop.
- the electronic device can also use the icon processing process described in FIGS. 4A-18 to group the activated unclassified icons on the desktop into a group on the page where the activated unclassified icons are located, or group the activated unclassified icons on the desktop.
- the icon is merged with the unclassified icon on the page where the activated unclassified icon is located, which will not be described here.
- FIG. 24 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 24, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
- the first page may be an interface as shown in FIG. 3 (a) or FIG. 22 (a), and the first application icon may be a card package as shown in FIG. 22 (a) Icon 2201.
- the electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- the operation performed by the user on the first application icon may be a long press operation, a press operation, a shaking operation, or a gesture operation of drawing a circle on the card bag icon 2201.
- the set grouping control may be a merge grouping control 2202 as shown in (b) of FIG. 22, or a grouping control as shown in (f) of FIG. 23, or may be as shown in FIG. 17
- the grouped floating ball 1702 shown in (b) may also be a buffer 1801 or the like as shown in (a) of FIG. 18.
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 22 (b).
- the user drags the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon) to merge into the grouping control 2202 (that is, setting Group control).
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the like.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the electronic device responds to the user continuing to drag the first application icon.
- the first application icon is located in the second group.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, and the user ’s operation on the second grouping is as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, and the user moves the card pack icon 2201 (that is, the first application) Icon) to continue the operation of dragging to the shopping group 311 (ie, the second group).
- the card pack icon 2201 is located in the shopping group 311.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the second application icon by the user is as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the user moves the card pack icon 2201 (that is, the first An application icon) continues to be dragged to the LeTV video icon 312 (that is, the second application icon).
- the card pack icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group.
- the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control.
- the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the second application displayed on the grouping interface.
- the positions of the icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, which may include: the electronic device responds to the user continuing to drag the first
- the operation of an application icon to the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application is displayed in the second group according to the target position icon.
- the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
- FIG. 25 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 25, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
- the electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- steps 2501-250 refer to the description of steps 2401-2402, which are not described here.
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 22 (b).
- the user drags the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon) to merge into the grouping control 2202 (that is, setting Group controls) and let go.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (e) in FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (c) in FIG. 23, and the like.
- the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the operation of the second group by the user is as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the user clicks to select the shopping group 311 (that is, the second group). operating.
- the card pack icon 2201 is located in the shopping group 311.
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the user on the second application icon is the operation of clicking the LeEco video icon 312 by the user as shown in (c) of FIG. In response to this operation, as shown in (b) in FIG. 23, the card pack icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group.
- the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control.
- the electronic device In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device
- the grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can conveniently switch the first application icon on the first page and the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface.
- the two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
- the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the group control by releasing the element, and the element in the grouping interface is in a standby state. In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
- FIG. 26 Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 26, the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
- the electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
- steps 2601-2602 For the description of steps 2601-2602, refer to the description of steps 2401-2402 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user operation for setting a grouping control.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the operation of the user to set the grouping control may be as shown in (f) of FIG. 22, and the user clicks and merges into the grouping control (that is, setting the grouping control); or, when the grouping control is set as shown in FIG.
- the user's operation for setting the grouping control may also be an operation that the user drags the hoverball 1702 to the position of the card pack icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon).
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (e) in FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (c) in FIG. 23, and the like.
- the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the operation of the user on the second group is as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, the user clicks on the shopping group 311 (that is, the second group). .
- the card pack icon 2201 is located in the shopping group 311.
- the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the user on the second application icon is the operation of clicking the LeEco video icon 312 by the user as shown in (c) of FIG. In response to this operation, as shown in (b) of FIG. 23, the card pack icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 form a new group.
- a user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping control.
- the electronic device can display a grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or facilitates the user to create a new combination of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
- the grouping interface may include all groups. In this way, users can conveniently switch the first application icon on the desktop to any group on the desktop.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) or (e) of FIG. 22, and the grouping interface includes all groups on the desktop.
- the grouping interface may include all groups on the desktop and other icons except the first application icon. In this way, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon on the desktop to an existing group on the desktop, or it is convenient for the user to form a new group of the first application icon on the desktop and an application icon other than the first application icon on the desktop.
- the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) or (c) of FIG. 23. The grouping interface includes all the groups on the desktop and other application icons except the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon). .
- another embodiment of the present application provides a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, which is applied to an electronic device.
- the method may include:
- the electronic device displays a first GUI in response to a user operation on the first application icon, and the first GUI includes a setting grouping control, where the first application icon is located on a first page of the desktop or the first application icon In the first group on the first page.
- the first GUI may include an interface including changing a grouping control 1601 (ie, setting a grouping control) shown in FIG. 16A (b), and including changing a grouping control 1701 (ie, shown in FIG. 17 (a))
- Set the group control) interface as shown in Figure 17 (b) includes the interface to change the group hoverball 1702 (that is, set the group control), or as shown in Figure 22 (b) includes the merge to group control
- An interface of 2201 that is, setting a grouping control
- an interface including a grouping control that is, setting a grouping control
- the electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user's operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI, and the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; or, Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI to display a grouping interface.
- the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
- the first application icon can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the setting group control is displayed on the first GUI, in response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the setting group control or in response to For the operation of setting the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user to conveniently switch the first application icon to the second grouping displayed on the grouping interface.
- the application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
- setting grouping control mentioned in the above embodiment can also be called other controls, such as aggregate control, merge control, etc., as long as the function of setting the grouping control described in the embodiment can be understood as an embodiment of the present invention Set the grouping control mentioned in.
- the first element may be an element on the first page.
- the first application icon in the first group on the first page and the second application icon on the first page form a new group.
- the first element may also be an element on a second page.
- the user does not need to drag the first application icon in the first group on the first page to cut the screen.
- the second application icon on the second page forms a new group.
- the user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group on the second page without dragging the first application icon on the first page to cut the screen; or, the first The first application icon on one page and the second application icon on the second page form a new group. Therefore, the user's operation is simpler.
- the first application icon may be the Sohu video icon 307 in the first group on the first page
- the second group may be the audio and video group 310 on the second page
- the second application icon may be LeTV on the second page.
- the first application icon may be the card icon 2201 on the first page
- the second group may be the shopping icon 311 on the second page
- the second application icon may be the LeTV video icon 312 on the second page.
- the electronic device after the first application icon is located in the second group, if the electronic device detects an operation of the user to click the return key, the electronic device displays a page on which the second group is located. In this way, it is convenient for the user to return to the page where the group after the first application icon is switched is located.
- the audio and video group 310 is a group on the second page.
- the electronic device detects that the user clicks the return key For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 4B, the electronic device displays a second page on which the audiovisual group 310 is located.
- another embodiment of the present application also provides an icon switching method, which can be applied to an electronic device having a drawer mode.
- the electronic device may include one or more drawer interfaces, and each drawer interface may include multiple elements.
- the electronic device displays elements (such as icons, widgets, or groups) in the drawer ).
- the drawer button 2701 can also be called up when needed, and hidden when not needed.
- the desktop may include elements commonly used by the user
- the drawer may include elements not commonly used by the user
- the drawer may include all elements on the electronic device.
- elements on the desktop and elements on the drawer interface may be isolated, and the electronic device may use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 on each page of the desktop. At times, the icons on the desktop are processed; or, the electronic device may use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 to process the icons on the drawer interface in the drawer mode.
- the drawer interface can be understood as a desktop page, and the electronic device can use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 to process icons between different pages on the desktop (including the drawer interface).
- the drawer interface can be understood as a page on the desktop.
- the element displayed on the grouping interface carries a pattern identifier, and the pattern identifier is used to mark whether the element originates from the desktop or the drawer interface.
- the electronic device detects that the user selects an element from the desktop on the grouping interface, the electronic device classifies the activated icon into the group of the desktop; when the electronic device detects that the user selects an element from the drawer interface on the grouping interface When the element is selected, the electronic device groups the activated icon into a group in the drawer interface.
- the electronic device determines that the activated icon originates from the desktop
- the grouping of the activated icon is displayed on the desktop
- the activated icon returns The incoming group is displayed on the drawer interface.
- the electronic device can cooperate with the software layers such as the application layer, the application framework layer, the function library layer, and the Linux kernel layer, and the cooperation between the modules of the application framework layer.
- Implement icon processing functions Specifically, when the icon processing function is implemented, when a user wants to use the icon switching method provided in FIG. 4A to FIG. 27 in the foregoing embodiment of the present application to group application icons installed on an electronic device, the user may execute an instruction to start the icon. Input for grouping function.
- the application framework layer detects the user's input, it notifies the application layer to group the applications.
- the icon grouping application in the application layer accesses the icon grouping interface management service provided by the application framework layer through related APIs to implement the icon grouping function, thereby switching the icon to another group or grouping the icon into a newly created group.
- the system runtime layer and the Linux kernel layer are used to support the normal operation of the system when the icon grouping function is implemented.
- the process of switching the Sohu video icon 307 to the audio / video group 310 by setting a group control described in FIG. 16A is used as an example for description.
- the window management module displays the opened entertainment group 305.
- the input management module detects an input event that the user presses the Sohu video icon 307
- the input management module notifies the window management module of the input event.
- the window management module determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the Sohu video icon 307, and notifies the activity management module to execute the processing service of the Sohu video icon 307 corresponding to the input event.
- the activity management module executes the Sohu video icon 307 processing service corresponding to the input event, including: updating the view, notifying the window management module to display a menu list and an open entertainment group 305, and the menu list includes setting group controls (ie, changing the group control 1601) , Share controls, uninstall controls, and more.
- the window management module displays a menu list and an open entertainment group 305 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 16A.
- the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 to the change group control 1601
- the input management module notifies the input event To the window management module.
- the window management module determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the Sohu video icon 307, and notifies the activity management module to execute the processing service of the Sohu video icon 307 corresponding to the input event.
- the activity management module obtains all other groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop, and the application name and application icon included in each group from the application group module.
- the application information such as the application name and application icon of each application stored by the application grouping module is obtained from the application management module.
- the activity management module executes the Sohu video icon 307 processing service corresponding to the input event including: hiding other icons in the entertainment group 305 except the Sohu video icon 307, updating the view, and notifying the window management module to display the Sohu video icon 307 and the desktop pages Other groups than the entertainment group 305.
- the window management module displays a Sohu video icon 307 and other groups other than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop on the group interface 1602 shown in (d) of FIG. 16A.
- the activity management module executing the Sohu video icon 307 processing service corresponding to the input event includes: updating the view, notifying the group management module to update the group information, and notifying the window management module to display the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310.
- the window management module displays an interface as shown in (f) of FIG. 16A, and displays a Sohu video icon 307 in the thumbnail of the audio and video group 310 on the interface.
- the group management module updates the corresponding relationship between the video and audio group 310 and the Sohu video icon 307, and deletes the corresponding relationship between the Sohu video icon 307 and the entertainment group 305.
- the process of switching the Sohu video icon 307 to the audio / video group 310 by setting the group control described in (a), (b), (c), (d), (f) and FIG. 16B described in FIG. 16A is performed as an example. Instructions. The difference from the specific implementation process of FIG. 16A described above is that:
- the input management module When the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the Sohu video icon 307 in the entertainment group 305 to the change group control 1601, the input management module notifies the window management module of the input event. After receiving the input event, the window management module determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the Sohu video icon 307, and notifies the activity management module to execute the processing service of the Sohu video icon 307 corresponding to the input event. After receiving the notification from the window management module, the activity management module obtains from the application grouping module other groups than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop, and the application name and application icon included in each group. The application information such as the application name and application icon of each application stored by the application grouping module is obtained from the application management module.
- the activity management module executes the Sohu video icon 307 processing service corresponding to the input event includes: updating the view, and the notification window management module displaying the Sohu video icon 307 and all other groups except the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop.
- the window management module displays the Sohu video icon 307 and other groups other than the entertainment group 305 on each page of the desktop on the group interface 1602 shown in (d) of FIG. 16A.
- the input management module detects that the user releases the input event on the interface shown in (d) in FIG. 16A, it determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the Sohu video icon 307 and notifies the event management module to execute the Sohu video.
- the icon 307 corresponds to the processing service of the input event.
- the processing service that the activity management module executes the icon 307 corresponding to the input event includes: updating the view, and notifying the window management module to hide the Sohu video icon 307.
- the window management module displays the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, hides the Sohu video icon 307, and displays a selection box for each group.
- the selection box is blank and used for Indicates that the group is in a pending state.
- the input management module detects the input event that the user clicks to select the audio / video group 310 and clicks the OK button, the input management module notifies the input event to the window management module.
- the window management module displays a check mark at the position of the video and audio group 310, and determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the video and audio group 310, and notifies the activity management module to execute the video and audio group 310 corresponding to the input event.
- the activity management module executing the Sohu video icon 307 processing service corresponding to the input event includes: updating the view, notifying the group management module to update the group information, and notifying the window management module to display the Sohu video icon 307 in the audio and video group 310.
- the window management module displays an interface as shown in (f) of FIG. 16A, and displays a Sohu video icon 307 in the thumbnail of the audio and video group 310 on the interface.
- the group management module updates the corresponding relationship between the video and audio group 310 and the Sohu video icon 307, and deletes the corresponding relationship between the Sohu video icon 307 and the entertainment group 305.
- the window management module displays a first page 300 of the desktop.
- the input management module detects the input event of the user pressing the card package icon 2201, the input management module notifies the input event to the window management module.
- the window management module determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the card package icon 2201, and notifies the activity management module to execute the processing service of the card package icon 2201 corresponding to the input event.
- the activity management module executes the card package icon 2201.
- the processing service corresponding to the input event includes: updating the view, notifying the window management module to display a menu list and a first page 300, and the menu list includes setting grouping controls (for example, merging to grouping control 2202) , Share controls, uninstall controls, and more.
- the window management module displays a menu list and a first page 300 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 22.
- the input management module When the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the card pack icon 2201 to the merged into the group control 2202, the input management module notifies the input event to the window management module. After receiving the input event, the window management module determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the card package icon 2201, and notifies the activity management module to execute the processing service of the card package icon 2201 corresponding to the input event. After receiving the notification from the window management module, the activity management module obtains all the groups on each page of the desktop from the application grouping module, as well as the application names and application icons included in each group, and obtains the unclassified applications on the desktop from the application management module. Application name and application icon.
- the application information such as the application name and application icon of each application stored by the application grouping module is obtained from the application management module.
- the activity management module executes the card package icon 2201 corresponding to the processing event of the input event includes: updating the view, the notification window management module respectively displays the card package icon 2201, and all the groups on each page of the desktop and all unexcepted card package icons 2201 Classification icon.
- the window management module displays a card package icon 2201 above the grouping interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and displays all the groups and the All unclassified icons except card pack icon 2201.
- the input management module detects that the user has not released the drag operation after continuously dragging the card icon 2201 to the position of the LeEco video icon 312 shown in (a) of FIG. 22 after the drag operation shown in FIG. 22 (b)
- the event management module is notified to execute the card package icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 to perform processing services corresponding to the input event.
- the activity management module executes the card package icon 2201 and the LeTV video icon 312 corresponding to the input event.
- the processing services include: updating the view, notifying the group management module to create a new group 2301, and notifying the window management module to display the card package icon in the new group 2301. 2201 and LeTV video icon 312.
- the window management module displays an interface as shown in (b) of FIG. 23, and the card package icon 2201 and the LeEco video icon 312 are displayed in the thumbnail of the new group 2301 on the interface.
- the group management module updates the correspondence between the new group 2301, the card pack icon 2201, and the LeTV video icon 312.
- the electronic device includes hardware and / or software modules corresponding to performing each function.
- the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
- the embodiments of the present application may divide the functional modules of the electronic device according to the foregoing method examples.
- each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
- FIG. 28 illustrates a possible composition diagram of the electronic device 2800 involved in the foregoing embodiment.
- the electronic device 2800 may include: a display unit 2801, an input unit 2802, and a processing unit 2803.
- the display unit 2801 may be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the operations of displaying the first page in the above steps 1901, 2001, step 2101, step 2401, step 2501, and step 2601; support the electronic device 2800 to perform the above steps 1902, 2002 And the operation of displaying the opened first group in step 2102; supporting the electronic device 2800 to perform the operations of setting the grouping control in steps 1903, 2003, 2103, 2402, 2502, and 2602; supporting the electronic device 2800 to perform the above steps 1904, step 2004, step 2104, step 2403, step 2503, and step 2603 of displaying the operation of the grouping interface; and / or other processes for the techniques described herein.
- the input unit 2802 can be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the operations of the user receiving the first group, the operation of the first application icon, the operation of setting the group control, and the operation of the second group in FIGS. Steps of grouped operations and operations on second application icons, etc .; and / or other processes for the techniques described herein.
- the processing unit 2803 may be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the above-mentioned steps 1905, 2005, 2105, 2404, 2504, and 2604.
- the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group or the first application icon is located in the first group. Operations in two groups; and / or other processes for the techniques described herein.
- the electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application is configured to perform the foregoing method for implementing icon switching, and therefore, the same effect as that of the foregoing method for implementing icon switching can be achieved.
- the electronic device may include a processing module and a storage module.
- the processing module may be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device.
- the processing module may be used to support the electronic device to execute the steps performed by the display unit 2801, the input unit 2802, and the processing unit 2803.
- the storage module may be used to support the correspondence between the name of the application icon and the group, and the storage of the program code and data in the electronic device.
- the electronic device may further include a communication module, which may be used to support communication between the electronic device and other devices.
- the processing module may be a processor or a controller. It may implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in connection with the disclosure of this application.
- the processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination including one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, and so on.
- the memory module may be a memory.
- the communication module may specifically be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, and a wifi chip.
- the electronic device involved in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having a structure shown in FIG. 2A.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium.
- the computer storage medium stores computer instructions.
- the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the related method steps to implement the icon switching in the foregoing embodiment. Implementation.
- the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, and when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the foregoing related steps to implement the method for implementing icon switching in the foregoing embodiment.
- an embodiment of the present application further provides a device.
- the device may specifically be a chip, a component, or a module.
- the device may include a connected processor and a memory.
- the memory is used to store instructions executed by a computer.
- the processor may execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the method for implementing icon switching in the foregoing method embodiments.
- the electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product, or chip provided in the embodiments of the present application are used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding methods provided above The beneficial effects in the method are not repeated here.
- the integrated unit When the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium.
- the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application essentially or partly contribute to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solutions may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium
- the instructions include a number of instructions for causing a device (which can be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application.
- the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种图标切换方法、显示图形用户界面(graphical user interface,GUI)的方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the technical field of terminals, and in particular, to a method for switching icons, a method for displaying a graphical user interface (GUI), and an electronic device.
随着移动终端技术的发展,电子设备的能力越来越强,能够为用户提供越来越多的服务。电子设备的显示界面上包括多个图标,用于提供多种应用或功能。With the development of mobile terminal technology, the capabilities of electronic devices are getting stronger and stronger, and they can provide users with more and more services. The display interface of the electronic device includes multiple icons for providing various applications or functions.
在具有触摸显示屏的电子设备上,例如,目标分组与待切换的图标不在桌面的同一页面,用户需要拖动图标进行页面切换,当切换至目标分组所在的目标页面时,再将待切换图标拖动到目标页面上的目标分组中。比如,如图1中的(a)所示,手机桌面的第一页面101中包括娱乐分组102,娱乐分组102中包括搜狐视频图标103;如图1中的(d)所示,手机桌面的第二页面104中包括影音分组105。当用户想要将图标103从娱乐分组102切换到影音分组105时,如图1中的(a)和(b)所示,用户可以点击打开娱乐分组102;如图1中的(c)所示,用户将搜狐视频图标103拖动到屏幕的边界;如图1中的(d)所示,当手机切换显示第二页面104后,用户将搜狐视频图标103继续拖动至影音分组105中。这样,如图1中的(e)所示,搜狐视频图标103切换到影音分组105中。可见,在跨页面切换图标的分组时,用户需要长时间、长距离、多方向地持续拖动图标,从而进行页面切换和分组切换,因而操作复杂,操作难度比较大。On an electronic device with a touch display screen, for example, the target group and the icon to be switched are not on the same page of the desktop. The user needs to drag the icon to switch pages. When switching to the target page where the target group is located, the icon to be switched is Drag to the target group on the target page. For example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 1, the
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请技术方案提供一种图标切换方法、显示图形用户界面GUI的方法及电子设备,能够在切换图标的分组时使得用户的操作更为简单。The technical solution of the present application provides an icon switching method, a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, and an electronic device, which can make a user's operation easier when switching the grouping of icons.
本申请采用如下技术方案:This application uses the following technical solutions:
第一方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a first aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; In response to the user's operation on the first group, the opened first group is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, the set group control is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the set group control, the display is displayed A grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, In response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,通过对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating the first application icon in the first group, the first application icon can be activated and the grouping control is displayed. By operating the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the group interface, or facilitates the user to create a new one composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the group interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user's operation on setting the grouped control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouped control; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press or Pressure operation; the operation of the user on the second group is the user's click, long press or pressure operation on the second group.
第二方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a second aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; In response to the user's operation on the first group, the opened first group is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the setting The operation of the grouping control displays a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. In response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application The icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二应用图标的位置以组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the position of the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface to form A new group, thereby switching the first application icon into the new group.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
在一种可能的设计中,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In a possible design, in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
这样,电子设备可以根据用户在第二分组中停止拖动图标的落点位置,在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In this way, the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
第三方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a third aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; In response to the user's operation on the first group, the opened first group is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the setting The operation of the grouping control displays a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. In response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon are composed. A new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can easily switch the first application icon in the first grouping to the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface. The two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
在另一种可能的设计中,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件后松手的操作,分组界面中的元素处于待选状态。In another possible design, in response to a user dragging the first application icon to a loose operation after setting the grouping control, the element in the grouping interface is in a waiting state.
这样,可以方便用户从分组界面中选择第二分组或第二应用图标。In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
第四方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a fourth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying the setting group control; in response to the user's operation for setting the grouping control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; Operation, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to a user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,通过对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating a first application icon on a first page, a user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping control. By operating a grouping control, the electronic device can display a grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or facilitates the user to create a new combination of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouping control; The operation of the second application icon is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second application icon; the user's operation on the second group is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second group.
第五方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a fifth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method, which is applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a setting group control; in response to a user dragging the first application icon to the setting group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to the user The operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon continues, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二应用图标的位置以组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the second application displayed on the grouping interface. The positions of the icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
在一种可能的设计中,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的 操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In a possible design, in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
这样,电子设备可以根据用户在第二分组中停止拖动图标的落点位置,在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In this way, the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
第六方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a sixth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method, which is applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a setting group control; in response to a user dragging the first application icon to the setting group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; in response to the user For the operation of the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组,或方便用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed to facilitate the operation of the second application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group, or the user's operation of the second group, the first application icon switches to the new group in.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate; the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
在另一种可能的设计中,电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件后松手的操作,分组界面中的元素处于待选状态。In another possible design, the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon by the user to set the grouping control, and the element in the grouping interface is in a waiting state.
这样,可以方便用户从分组界面中选择第二分组或第二应用图标。In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
可以理解的,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,也可以为:响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户对分组控件的操作,显示分组界面。It can be understood that, in response to the user's operation on the first application icon, the setting group control is displayed; in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, the grouping interface is displayed. Apply the operation of the icon to display and set the grouping control; in response to the user's operation on the grouping control, display the grouping interface.
第七方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种显示图形用户界面GUI的方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示第一GUI,第一GUI上包括设置分组控件。其中,第一应用图标位于桌面的第一页面上,或者第一应用图标位于第一页面上的第一分组中。响应于用户对第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面;或者,响应于用户将第一应用图标拖动至第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面。其中,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。In a seventh aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, which is applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first GUI in response to a user operation on a first application icon, and the first GUI displays Including setting grouping controls. The first application icon is located on the first page of the desktop, or the first application icon is located in the first group on the first page. A grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI; or, a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the grouping control on the first GUI. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
可以理解的,第一GUI与桌面的第一页面可以不同,也可以相同。Understandably, the first GUI and the first page of the desktop may be different or the same.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并在第一GUI上显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作或者响应于对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the setting group control is displayed on the first GUI, in response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the setting group control or in response to For the operation of setting the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user to conveniently switch the first application icon to the second grouping displayed on the grouping interface. The application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压 力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作。Among them, the user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on setting the grouping control.
第八方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In an eighth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; In response to the user's operation on the first group, the opened first group is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first element, and the first element includes the first element Two groups or the second application icon; in response to the user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located at In the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the group interface is displayed, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon in the first group to the group interface. In the displayed second group, or a new group composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon to the new group.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
第九方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a ninth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; In response to the user's operation on the first group, the opened first group is displayed; in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first element, and the first element includes the first element Two groups or second application icons; in response to another operation of the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示分组界面,从而方便用户通过对第一应用图标的另一操作,将第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者将第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the grouping interface can be displayed, thereby facilitating the user to perform the first application by performing another operation on the first application icon. The icon is switched to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or a new group consisting of the first application icon and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface is switched, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
在一种可能的设计中,响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a possible design, in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: responding In the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
在另一种可能的设计中,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In another possible design, in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group , Displaying the opened second group; in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, displaying the first application icon in the second group according to the target position.
第十方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标;响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a tenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon; in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group Or, in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating the first application icon on the first page, the user can activate the first application icon and display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon on the first page to the grouping interface. In the displayed second group, it is convenient for the user to create a new group consisting of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the group interface, so as to switch the first application icon to the new group.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate; the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
第十一方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种图标切换方法,应用于电子设备,方法包括:电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。According to an eleventh aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an icon switching method applied to an electronic device. The method includes: the electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon; Operation to display a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon. In response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon are composed. A new group; or, the first application icon is in the second group.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示分组界面,从而方便用户通过对第一应用图标的另一操作,将第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者将第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating the first application icon on the first page, the user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to perform another operation on the first application icon to the first application icon. The icon is switched to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or a new group consisting of the first application icon and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface is switched, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
在一种可能的设计中,响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a possible design, in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: responding In the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application The icon is in the second group.
在另一种可能的设计中,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In another possible design, in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group , Displaying the opened second group; in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, displaying the first application icon in the second group according to the target position.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,分组界面包括桌面上除第一页面上的第一分组以外的其他分组。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the first group on the first page.
这样,可以方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到除第一分组以外的其他分组中。In this way, the user can conveniently switch the first application icon in the first group to a group other than the first group.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,分组界面包括桌面上除第一页面上的第一分组以外的其他分组和桌面上的应用图标。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the first group on the first page and application icons on the desktop.
这样,可以方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到除第一分组以外的其他 分组中,或者将第一分组中的第一应用图标与桌面上的应用图标组成新的分组。In this way, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon in the first group to a group other than the first group, or to form a new group with the first application icon in the first group and the application icon on the desktop.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,分组界面上包括所有的分组。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, the grouping interface includes all the groups.
这样,可以方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标切换到桌面上的任意分组中。In this way, users can conveniently switch the first application icon on the desktop to any group on the desktop.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,分组界面包括桌面上的所有分组和除第一应用图标以外的其他图标。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, the grouping interface includes all groups on the desktop and other icons except the first application icon.
这样,可以方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标切换到桌面上已有的分组中,或者方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标与桌面上的其他应用图标组成新的分组。In this way, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon on the desktop to an existing group on the desktop, or for the user to form a new group with the first application icon on the desktop and other application icons on the desktop.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,第一元素为桌面的第二页面上的元素。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, the first element is an element on the second page of the desktop.
这样,用户不需要拖动第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标进行切屏,就可以将第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标切换至第二页面上的第二分组中;或者,将第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标与第二页面上的第二应用图标组成新的分组。用户不需要拖动第一页面上的第一应用图标进行切屏,就可以将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换至第二页面上的第二分组中;或者,将第一页面上的第一应用图标与第二页面上的第二应用图标组成新的分组。因而,用户切换图标分组的操作更为简单。In this way, the user does not need to drag the first application icon in the first group on the first page to cut the screen, and can switch the first application icon in the first group on the first page to the first page icon on the second page. In two groups; or, a new group is formed by the first application icon in the first group on the first page and the second application icon on the second page. The user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group on the second page without dragging the first application icon on the first page to cut the screen; or, The first application icon and the second application icon on the second page form a new group. Therefore, the operation of the user to switch the icon group is simpler.
结合上述任意方面,在另一种可能的设计中,在第一应用图标位于第二分组中之后,若电子设备检测到用户点击返回键的操作,则电子设备显示第二分组所在的页面。In combination with any of the above aspects, in another possible design, after the first application icon is located in the second group, if the electronic device detects an operation of the user clicking the return key, the electronic device displays a page on which the second group is located.
这样,可以方便用户返回第一应用图标切换后的分组所在的页面。In this way, it is convenient for the user to return to the page where the group after the first application icon is switched is located.
第十二方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twelfth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Displaying the opened first group; responding to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, displaying a setting group control; and responding to the user's operation on setting the group control, displaying a grouping interface, the grouping interface including the first element, The first element is a second application icon or a second group. The processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一分组的操作,触摸屏显示打开的第一分组;也可以响应用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; or may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays and sets the group control.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user's operation on setting the grouped control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouped control; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press or Pressure operation; the operation of the user on the second group is the user's click, long press or pressure operation on the second group.
第十三方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个 或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a thirteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Display the opened first group; display the set group control in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group; respond to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, display the group interface, group The interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The processor is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second Group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一分组的操作,触摸屏显示打开的第一分组;处理器可以响应用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件;处理器可以响应用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group control; processing The device may respond to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In a possible design, the processor is configured to respond to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon The operation to the second group displays the opened second group; and in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
第十四方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a fourteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, Display the opened first group; display the set group control in response to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group; respond to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to set the group control, display the group interface, group The interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The processor is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一分组的操作,触摸屏显示打开的第一分组;处理器可以响应用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件;处理器可以响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user ’s operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group control; processing The device may respond to an operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set a grouping control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
在另一种可能的设计中,处理器还用于响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件后松手后,分组界面中的第一元素处于待选状态。In another possible design, the processor is further configured to respond to that after the user drags the first application icon to set the grouping control and releases, the first element in the grouping interface is in a standby state.
第十五方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a fifteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user For the operation of setting a grouping control, a grouping interface is displayed. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件;处理器可以响应用户对设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays the setting group control; the processor may respond to the user's operation on the setting group control, and the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on the setting of the grouping control; The operation of the second application icon is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second application icon; the user's operation on the second group is a user's click, long press, or pressure operation on the second group.
第十六方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a sixteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control to display a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping. The processor is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second Group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件;处理器可以响应用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a setting group control; the processor may respond to a user dragging the first application icon to set a group control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In a possible design, the processor is configured to respond to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, and includes: in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon The operation to the second group displays the opened second group; and in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
第十七方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件;响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一 元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a seventeenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, displaying a setting group control; in response to the user Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control to display a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping. The processor is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示设置分组控件;处理器可以响应用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a setting group control; the processor may respond to a user dragging the first application icon to set a group control, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate; the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
第十八方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示第一GUI,第一GUI上包括设置分组控件。其中,第一应用图标位于桌面的第一页面上,或者第一应用图标位于第一页面上的第一分组中。响应于用户对第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面;或者,响应于用户将第一应用图标拖动至第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面。其中,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。In an eighteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first GUI in response to a user's operation of the first application icon, and the first GUI includes a setting grouping control. The first application icon is located on the first page of the desktop, or the first application icon is located in the first group on the first page. A grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control on the first GUI; or a grouping interface is displayed in response to a user's operation of dragging a first application icon to a grouping control on the first GUI. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
其中,触摸屏用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示第一GUI,可以为,处理器响应用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示第一GUI。The touch screen is configured to display the first GUI in response to a user's operation on the first application icon. The touch screen may be configured to display the first GUI in response to the user's operation on the first application icon.
其中,响应于用户对第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,可以为,处理器响应用户对第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。The grouping interface is displayed in response to the user's operation of setting the grouping control on the first GUI. The processor may respond to the user's operation of setting the grouping control on the first GUI and the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
其中,响应于用户将第一应用图标拖动至第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,可以为,处理器响应用户将将第一应用图标拖动至第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Wherein, in response to a user dragging the first application icon to set a grouping control on the first GUI to display a grouping interface, the processor may respond to the user dragging the first application icon to the first GUI to set up a grouping control. Operation, the touch screen displays the grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对设置分组控件的操作为,用户对设置分组控件的点击操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on setting the grouping control is the user's click operation on setting the grouping control.
第十九方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a nineteenth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, The opened first group is displayed; in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a group interface is displayed, the group interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon. The processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一分组的操作,触摸屏显示打开的第一分组;处理器响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor responds to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group interface.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold for a long time; the user ’s operation on the second application icon is the user ’s click, long press, or pressure on the second application icon; the user ’s operation on the second group is the user on the second group Click, long press, or press.
第二十方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组;响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标。处理器用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twentieth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page, the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon; in response to a user operation on the first group, The opened first group is displayed; in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, a group interface is displayed, the group interface includes a first element, and the first element includes a second group or a second application icon. The processor is configured to, in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group.
可以理解的,处理器可以响应用户对第一分组的操作,触摸屏显示打开的第一分组;处理器可以响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。Understandably, the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first group, and the touch screen displays the opened first group; the processor may respond to the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group, and the touch screen displays the group interface.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作为,用户对第一分组的点击操作;用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作为,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first group is a user's click operation on the first group; the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group is the user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. Press, press, or press and hold.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a possible design, the processor is configured to respond to another operation of the first application icon by the user, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group, Including: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, The first application icon is located in the second group.
在另一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In another possible design, the processor is configured to respond to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group by the user, and the first application icon is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to The operation of the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
第二十一方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标。处理器用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-first aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user operation on the first application icon, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first One element, the first element includes a second grouping or a second application icon. The processor is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
其中,处理器可以响应用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。The processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压 力长按操作;用户对第二应用图标的操作为,用户对第二应用图标的点击、长按或压力按操作;用户对第二分组的操作为,用户对第二分组的点击、长按或压力按操作。The operation of the user on the first application icon is the user's long-press, pressure or long-press operation on the first application icon; the user's operation on the second application icon is the user's click, long press on the second application icon Press or press to operate; the user's operation on the second group is the user's click, long press, or pressure on the second group.
第二十二方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括触摸屏、一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。触摸屏、一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,触摸屏用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素包括第二分组或第二应用图标;响应于用户对第一应用图标的另一操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-second aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including a touch screen, one or more processors, and one or more memories. The touch screen, one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors, and the one or more memories are used to store computer program code, and the computer program code includes computer instructions. When one or more processors execute computer instructions, the touch screen is used to display a first page including a first application icon on the first page; in response to a user operation on the first application icon, a grouping interface is displayed, and the grouping interface includes the first One element, the first element includes a second group or a second application icon; in response to another operation on the first application icon by the user, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located at In the second group.
其中,处理器可以响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,触摸屏显示分组界面。The processor may respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the touch screen displays a grouping interface.
其中,用户对第一应用图标的操作为,用户对第一应用图标的长按、压力按或压力长按操作。The user's operation on the first application icon is a user's long-press, pressure-press, or pressure-long-press operation on the first application icon.
在一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a possible design, the processor is configured to respond to a user operation on the first application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the first application icon is located in the second group and includes: In response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second group, the first The application icon is in the second group.
在另一种可能的设计中,处理器用于响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,包括:响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In another possible design, the processor is configured to respond to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, including: in response to the user dragging the first application icon to the second group The operation of grouping displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application icon is displayed in the second group according to the target position.
第二十三方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一分组的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户对设置分组控件的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对第二应用图标的操作,或接收用户对第二分组的操作。处理单元用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-third aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group. The display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation for setting a grouping control. The display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group. The processing unit is configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group in.
第二十四方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一分组的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标 至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,或者接收用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作。处理单元用于,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-fourth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group. The display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, or an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group. The processing unit is configured to: in response to the user's operation of dragging the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon For the operation of two groups, the first application icon is located in the second group.
第二十五方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一分组的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对第二应用图标的操作,或者接收用户对第二分组的操作。处理单元还用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或者响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-fifth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first group. The display unit is further configured to display the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The display unit is further configured to display a setting group control in response to a user's operation on the first application icon in the opened first group. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group. The processing unit is further configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group in.
第二十六方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户对设置分组控件的操作。处理单元还用于,响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对第二应用图标的操作,或接收用户对第二分组的操作。处理单元还用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-sixth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon. The display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation for setting a grouping control. The processing unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to a user's operation for setting a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group. The processing unit is further configured to: in response to a user's operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group Grouping.
第二十七方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,或接收用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作。处理单元还用于,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-seventh aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon. The display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, or an operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group. The processing unit is further configured to, in response to the user's operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to For the operation of the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
第二十八方面,本申请技术方案公开了一种电子设备,包括输入单元、显示单元 和处理单元。显示单元用于,显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。输入单元用于,接收用户对第一应用图标的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。输入单元还用于,接收用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作。显示单元还用于,响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。输入单元还用于,接收用户对第二应用图标的操作,或用户对第二分组的操作。处理单元用于,响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In a twenty-eighth aspect, the technical solution of the present application discloses an electronic device including an input unit, a display unit, and a processing unit. The display unit is configured to display a first page, where the first page includes a first application icon. The input unit is configured to receive a user operation on the first application icon. The display unit is further configured to display a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon. The input unit is further configured to receive an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The display unit is further configured to display a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group. The input unit is further configured to receive a user operation on the second application icon or a user operation on the second group. The processing unit is configured to: in response to a user operation on the second application icon, the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or in response to a user operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
可以理解的,上述实施例中的输入单元和显示单元可以为触摸显示屏。处理单元可以为处理器,例如应用处理器。It can be understood that the input unit and the display unit in the above embodiments may be a touch display screen. The processing unit may be a processor, such as an application processor.
第二十九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的设计中的图标切换方法或显示GUI的方法。In a twenty-ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium including computer instructions. When the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to perform icon switching in any of the possible designs in the foregoing aspects. Method or method for displaying the GUI.
第三十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方面任一项可能的设计中的图标切换方法或显示GUI的方法。In a thirtieth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute an icon switching method or a method of displaying a GUI in any of the possible designs of the foregoing aspects. .
图1为现有技术提供的一种切换图标分组的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a switch icon grouping provided by the prior art; FIG.
图2A为本申请实施例提供的一种手机的结构示意图;2A is a schematic structural diagram of a mobile phone according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的软件架构示意图;2B is a schematic diagram of a software architecture of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例提供的一种图标处理流程图;FIG. 2C is a flowchart of icon processing according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图3为本申请实施例提供的桌面上的第一页面和第二页面的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a first page and a second page on a desktop according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4A为本申请实施例提供的一组界面示意图;FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a set of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图4B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图14A为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;14A is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;14B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14C为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图15为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16A为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图16B为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种图标切换方法流程图;19 is a flowchart of an icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标切换方法流程图;20 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标切换方法流程图;FIG. 21 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图22为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;22 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图24为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标切换方法流程图;24 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图25为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标切换方法流程图;FIG. 25 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图26为本申请实施例提供的另一种图标切换方法流程图;FIG. 26 is a flowchart of another icon switching method according to an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图27为本申请实施例提供的另一组界面示意图;27 is a schematic diagram of another group of interfaces according to an embodiment of the present application;
图28为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图。FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Wherein, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise stated, "/" represents or means, for example, A / B may represent A or B; "and / or" herein is only a description of an associated object The association relationship indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and / or B can be expressed as: there are three cases where A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, “multiple” means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。In the following, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise stated, the meaning of "a plurality" is two or more.
本申请实施例提供的图标切换方法可以应用于具有触摸显示屏的电子设备。该电子设备可以是包含其他功能诸如个人数字助理和/或音乐播放器功能的便携式电子设备,诸如手机、平板电脑、具备无线通讯功能的可穿戴设备(如智能手表)等。便携式电子设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于搭载 或者其他操作系统的便携式电子设备。上述便携式电子设备也可以是其他便携式电子设备,诸如具有触敏表面(例如触控面板)的膝上型计算机(laptop)等。还应当理解的是,在本申请其他一些实施例中,上述电子设备也可以不是便携式电子设备,而是具有触敏表面(例如触控面板)的台式计算机。 The icon switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to an electronic device having a touch display screen. The electronic device may be a portable electronic device including other functions such as a personal digital assistant and / or a music player function, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wearable device with a wireless communication function (such as a smart watch), and the like. Exemplary embodiments of portable electronic devices include, but are not limited to, carrying Or portable electronic devices with other operating systems. The aforementioned portable electronic device may also be other portable electronic devices, such as a laptop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch panel), or the like. It should also be understood that, in other embodiments of the present application, the above electronic device may not be a portable electronic device, but a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (such as a touch panel).
示例性地,如图2A所示,本申请实施例中的电子设备可以为手机200。下面以手机200为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是,图2A所示手机200仅是电子设备的一个范例,并且手机200可以具有比图中所示出的更多的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或更多的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图2A中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 2A, the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone 200. The embodiment is specifically described below by taking the mobile phone 200 as an example. It should be understood that the mobile phone 200 shown in FIG. 2A is only an example of an electronic device, and the mobile phone 200 may have more or fewer components than those shown in the figure, and two or more components may be combined. Or it can have different component configurations. The various components shown in FIG. 2A may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and / or application specific integrated circuits.
如图2A所示,手机200可以包括:一个或多个处理器201、射频(radio frequency,RF)电路202、存储器203、触摸屏204、蓝牙装置205、一个或多个传感器206、无线保真(wireless fidelity,wifi)装置207、定位装置208、音频电路209、外设接口 210以及电源系统211等部件。这些部件可以连接在一起,例如这些部件通过一根或多根总线或信号线(图2A中未示出)进行通信。本领域技术人员可以理解,图2A中示出的硬件结构并不构成对手机200的限定,手机200可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。As shown in FIG. 2A, the mobile phone 200 may include one or
下面结合图2A对手机200的各个部件进行具体的介绍:The following describes each component of the mobile phone 200 in detail with reference to FIG. 2A:
处理器201是手机200的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接手机200的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器203内的应用程序,以及调用存储在存储器203内的数据和指令,执行手机200的各种功能和处理数据。在一些实施例中,处理器201可包括一个或多个处理单元;处理器201还可以集成应用处理器和基带处理器;其中,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,基带处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述基带处理器也可以不集成到处理器201中。举例来说,处理器201可以是华为技术有限公司制造的麒麟960芯片。在本申请一些实施例中,上述处理器201还可以包括指纹验证芯片,用于对采集到的指纹进行验证。The
在本申请其他一些实施例中,上述处理器201还可以包括AI芯片。AI芯片的学习和处理能力包括图像理解能力、自然语言理解能力和语音识别能力等。AI芯片可以使得手机200具有更好的性能、更长的续航时间以及更好的安全性和隐私性。In other embodiments of the present application, the
射频电路202可用于在收发信息或通话过程中,无线信号的接收和发送。具体地,射频电路202可以将基站的下行数据接收后,给处理器201处理;另外,将涉及上行的数据发送给基站。通常,射频电路可以包括天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外,射频电路202还可以通过无线通信和其他设备通信。无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于全球移动通讯系统、通用分组无线服务、码分多址、宽带码分多址、长期演进、电子邮件、短消息服务等。The
存储器203用于存储应用程序以及数据,处理器201通过运行存储在存储器203的应用程序以及数据,执行手机200的各种功能以及数据处理。存储器203主要包括存储程序区以及存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等);存储数据区可以存储根据使用手机200时所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)。此外,存储器203可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失存储器,例如磁盘存储器件、闪存器件或其他非易失性固态存储器件等。存储器203可以存储各种操作系统,例如苹果公司所开发的
操作系统,谷歌公司所开发的
操作系统等。示例性地,存储器203中存储了与本申请实施例相关的应用程序,例如taskcard store、推特、电话本、微博或微信等,存储器203中还存储可与本申请实施例注册登录相关的信息,例如用户名信息。
The
触摸屏204可以包括触敏表面204-1和显示器204-2。其中,触敏表面204-1(例如触控面板)可采集手机200的用户在其上或附近的触摸事件(比如用户使用手指、触控笔等任何适合的物体在触敏表面204-1上或在触敏表面204-1附近的操作),并将采集到的触摸信息发送给其他器件例如处理器201。其中,用户在触敏表面204-1附近的触摸事件可以称之为悬浮触控;悬浮触控可以是指,用户无需为了选择、移动或拖动目标(例如应用程序(application,App)图标等)而直接接触触控板,而只需 用户位于手机200附近以便执行所想要的功能。在悬浮触控的应用场景下,术语“触摸”、“接触”等不会暗示用于直接接触触摸屏204,而是在其附近或接近的接触。能够进行悬浮触控的触敏表面204-1可以采用电容式、红外光感以及超声波等实现。其中,触敏表面204-1可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其中,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再发送给处理器201,触摸控制器还可以接收处理器201发送的指令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型来实现触敏表面204-1。显示器(也称为显示屏)204-2可用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息以及手机200的各种菜单。可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示器204-2。触敏表面204-1可以覆盖在显示器204-2之上,当触敏表面204-1检测到在其上或附近的触摸事件后,传送给处理器201以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器201可以根据触摸事件的类型在显示器204-2上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图2A中,触敏表面204-1与显示屏204-2是作为两个独立的部件来实现手机200的输入和输出功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触敏表面204-1与显示屏204-2集成而实现手机200的输入和输出功能。另外,在本申请其他一些实施例中,触敏表面204-1可以覆盖在显示器204-2之上,并且触敏表面204-1的尺寸可以大于显示屏204-2的尺寸,使得显示屏204-2全部覆盖在触敏表面204-1下面,或者,上述触敏表面204-1可以以全面板的形式配置在手机200的正面,也即用户在手机200正面的触摸均能被手机感知,这样就可以实现手机正面的全触控体验。在其他一些实施例中,触敏表面204-1以全面板的形式配置在手机200的正面,显示屏204-2也可以以全面板的形式配置在手机200的正面,这样在手机的正面就能够实现无边框的结构。在本申请其他一些实施例中,触摸屏204还可以包括一系列的压力传感器阵列,可以使得手机感测触摸事件所施加给触摸屏204的压力。The
手机200还可以包括蓝牙装置205,用于实现手机200与其他短距离的电子设备(例如手机、智能手表等)之间的数据交换。本申请实施例中的蓝牙装置可以是集成电路或者蓝牙芯片等。The mobile phone 200 may further include a
手机200还可以包括至少一种传感器206,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地,光传感器可包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,其中,环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节触摸屏204的显示器的亮度,接近传感器可在手机200移动到耳边时,显示屏变暗。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等。The mobile phone 200 may further include at least one
在本申请一些实施例中,传感器206还可以包括指纹传感器。例如,可以在手机200的背面(例如后置摄像头的下方)配置指纹传感器,或者在手机200的正面(例如触摸屏204的下方)配置指纹传感器。另外,也可以通过在触摸屏204中配置指纹传感器来实现指纹识别功能,即指纹传感器可以与触摸屏204集成在一起来实现手机200的指纹识别功能。在这种情况下,该指纹传感器可以配置在触摸屏204中,可以 是触摸屏204的一部分,也可以以其他方式配置在触摸屏204中。另外,该指纹传感器还可以被实现为全面板指纹传感器,因此,可以把触摸屏204看成是任何位置都可以进行指纹采集的一个面板。该指纹传感器可以将采集到的指纹发送给处理器201,以便处理器201对该指纹进行处理(例如指纹验证等)。本申请实施例中的指纹传感器可以采用任何类型的感测技术,包括但不限于光学式、电容式、压电式或超声波传感技术等。In some embodiments of the present application, the
此外,至于手机200,还可配置的陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不予赘述。In addition, as for the mobile phone 200, other sensors such as a gyroscope, a barometer, a hygrometer, a thermometer, an infrared sensor, and the like may be configured, and details are not described herein.
wifi装置207,用于为手机200提供遵循wifi相关标准协议的网络接入,手机200可以通过wifi装置207接入到wifi接入点,进而帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。在其他一些实施例中,该wifi装置207也可以作为wifi无线接入点,可以为其他电子设备提供wifi网络接入。The
定位装置208,用于为手机200提供地理位置。可以理解的是,该定位装置208具体可以是全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、北斗卫星导航系统等定位系统的接收器。定位装置208在接收到上述定位系统发送的地理位置后,将该信息发送给处理器201处理,或者发送给存储器203保存。在另外的一些实施例中,该定位装置208可以是辅助全球卫星定位系统(assisted global positioning system,AGPS)的接收器,AGPS是一种在移动辅助配合下进行GPS定位的运行方式,它可以利用基站的信号,配合GPS卫星信号,可以让手机200定位的速度更快;在AGPS系统中,该定位装置208可通过与辅助定位服务器(例如手机200的定位服务器)的通信而获得定位辅助。AGPS系统通过作为辅助服务器来协助定位装置208完成测距和定位服务,在这种情况下,辅助定位服务器通过无线通信网络与手机200的定位装置208(即GPS接收器)通信而提供定位协助。在另外的一些实施例中,该定位装置208也可以是基于wifi接入点的定位技术。由于每一个wifi接入点都有一个全球唯一的MAC地址,手机200在开启wifi的情况下即可扫描并收集周围的WIFI接入点的广播信号,因此可以获取到wifi接入点广播出来的MAC地址;手机200将这些能够标示wifi接入点的数据(例如MAC地址)通过无线通信网络发送给位置服务器,由位置服务器检索出每一个wifi接入点的地理位置,并结合wifi广播信号的强弱程度,计算出该手机200的地理位置并发送到该手机200的定位装置208中。The
音频电路209、扬声器212、麦克风213可提供用户与手机200之间的音频接口。音频电路209可将接收到的音频数据转换后的电信号,传输到扬声器212,由扬声器212转换为声音信号输出;另一方面,麦克风213将收集的声音信号转换为电信号,由音频电路209接收后转换为音频数据,再将音频数据输出至RF电路202以发送给比如一个手机,或者将音频数据输出至存储器203以便进一步处理。The
外设接口210,用于为外部的输入/输出设备(例如键盘、鼠标、外接显示器、外部存储器、用户识别模块卡等)提供各种接口。例如通过通用串行总线接口与鼠标连接,通过用户识别模块卡卡槽上的金属触点与电信运营商提供的用户识别模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)卡连接。外设接口210可以被用来将上述外部的输入/输出外围设备耦接到处理器201和存储器203。The
可以理解的是,手机200还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源系统211(比如电池和电源管理芯片),电池可以通过电源管理芯片与处理器201连接,从而通过电源系统211实现管理充电、放电以及功耗管理等功能。It can be understood that the mobile phone 200 may further include a power supply system 211 (such as a battery and a power management chip) for supplying power to various components. The battery may be connected to the
尽管图2A未示出,手机200还可以包括摄像头,例如前置摄像头、后置摄像头,其中,前置摄像头可以用于捕捉人脸特征信息,处理器201可以对该人脸特征信息进行人脸识别,进而进行后续处理。手机200还可以包括闪光灯、微型投影装置、近场通信(near field communication,NFC)装置等,在此不予赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 2A, the mobile phone 200 may further include a camera, for example, a front camera and a rear camera, wherein the front camera may be used to capture facial feature information, and the
示例性的,图2B提供了一种可以运行在上述电子设备中的 操作系统的软件架构示意图。该软件架构可以分为四层,分别为应用程序(Applications)层,应用程序框架(Application Framework)层,函数库(Libraries)层和Linux内核(Linux Kernel)层。 Exemplarily, FIG. 2B provides a device that can be run in the electronic device. Software architecture diagram of the operating system. The software architecture can be divided into four layers, namely the Applications layer, the Application Framework layer, the Libraries layer, and the Linux Kernel layer.
(1)、应用程序层(1) Application layer
应用程序层是Android系统中与用户交互的层级。应用程序层包括手机的各种应用,例如设置、联系人、短信、通话、图库、日历、浏览器等系统应用,或者微信、优酷等第三方应用。应用程序层可以根据不同应用访问应用程序框架层提供的服务。例如,在对桌面上显示的图标进行处理时,应用程序层中的图标处理应用可以访问应用程序框架层提供的图标处理接口管理服务。一般而言,应用程序使用Java语言开发,通过调用应用程序框架层所提供的应用程序编程接口(application programming interface,API)来完成。The application layer is the level of interaction with the user in the Android system. The application layer includes various applications of the mobile phone, such as system applications such as settings, contacts, text messages, calls, photo galleries, calendars, browsers, or third-party applications such as WeChat and Youku. The application layer can access services provided by the application framework layer according to different applications. For example, when processing the icons displayed on the desktop, the icon processing application in the application layer can access the icon processing interface management service provided by the application framework layer. Generally speaking, an application program is developed using the Java language and is completed by calling an application programming interface (API) provided by an application framework layer.
(2)、应用程序框架层(2), application framework layer
应用程序框架层主要是为开发者提供了可以访问应用程序所使用的各种API。对于不同的应用,应用程序框架层为应用程序层提供的API不同,服务也不同。例如,在对图标进行处理时,应用程序框架层可以为应用程序层提供图标处理功能相关的API,并为应用程序层提供图标处理接口管理服务,以实现图标处理功能。The application framework layer mainly provides developers with access to various APIs used by the application. For different applications, the application framework layer provides different APIs and services for the application layer. For example, when processing an icon, the application framework layer may provide an API related to the icon processing function for the application layer, and provide an icon processing interface management service for the application layer to implement the icon processing function.
具体的,开发者可以通过应用程序框架来与操作系统的底层(例如函数库、Linux内核等)进行交互,开发自己的应用程序。该应用程序框架可以是 操作系统的一系列的服务和管理系统。应用程序框架主要包括如下基础服务: Specifically, developers can interact with the bottom layer of the operating system (such as function libraries, Linux kernels, etc.) through the application framework to develop their own applications. The application framework can be A series of service and management systems for operating systems. The application framework mainly includes the following basic services:
窗口管理(Window Manager)模块:用于管理在屏幕上使用的图形用户界面资源,具体可包括:窗口的创建和销毁、窗口的显示与隐藏、窗口的布局、焦点的管理以及输入法和壁纸管理等。Window Manager (Window Manager) module: It is used to manage the graphical user interface resources used on the screen, which can include: the creation and destruction of windows, the display and hiding of windows, the layout of windows, the management of focus, the input method and wallpaper management Wait.
活动管理(Activity Manager)模块:用于管理每个应用的生命周期。应用通常以Activity的形式运行在操作系统中。对于每一个Activity,在活动管理器中都会有一个与之对应的应用记录(Activity Record),这个Activity Record记录了该应用的Activity的状态。活动管理器可以利用这个Activity Record作为标识,调度应用的Activity进程。Activity Management (ActivityManager) module: used to manage the life cycle of each application. Applications usually run in the operating system as an Activity. For each Activity, there will be an application record (ActivityRecord) corresponding to it in the Activity Manager, and this ActivityRecord records the activity state of the application. The activity manager can use this Activity record as an identifier to schedule the application's Activity process.
视图:具有丰富的、可扩展的视图集合,可用于构建一个应用程序,它具体包括列表(List)、网格(Grid)、文本框(TextBox)、按钮(Button),以及可嵌入的网页浏览器。Views: A rich and extensible collection of views that can be used to build an application, which specifically include List, Grid, TextBox, Button, and embeddable web browsing Device.
通知管理(Notification Manager)模块:用于控制应用程序在状态栏、锁屏界面等显示提示信息(例如警告(Alerts)、通知(Notifications)等)给用户。Notification Manager module: It is used to control the application program to display prompt information (such as Alerts, Notifications, etc.) to the user in the status bar, lock screen, etc.
在本申请实施例中,应用程序框架层还可以包括输入管理模块、分组管理模块和应用管理模块等。参见图2C,各模块间相互配合来实现图标处理功能。具体的,在用户想要使用图标处理功能时,可以触发用于指示启动图标处理功能的输入。输入管理模块可以用于,检测用户的输入事件,并将输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。示例性的,该输入事件可以是用户的触摸操作(例如点击、双击、双指点击、长按、压力按、压力长按、拖动、单指滑动、双指滑动或拖动等)、悬浮操作或语音输入操作等。窗口管理模块具体可以用于,接收输入管理模块通知的输入事件,确定输入事件触发的关联元素(例如关联图标或关联分组)和处理业务,通知活动管理模块执行关联元素对应该输入事件的处理业务,并根据活动管理模块的通知更新视图(View)。活动管理模块具体可以用于,根据输入事件对关联元素进行业务处理,根据业务处理场景构建新的视图,通知窗口管理模块更新视图。并且,从分组管理模块获取应用分组信息,或根据业务处理通知分组管理模块更新应用分组信息。分组管理模块可以用于管理应用的分组信息,例如分组与图标的对应关系,分组在桌面上的位置以及图标在分组中的位置等。应用管理模块可以用于提供系统中所有应用的信息,例如提供应用名称和应用图标等。In the embodiment of the present application, the application framework layer may further include an input management module, a group management module, an application management module, and the like. Referring to FIG. 2C, the modules cooperate with each other to implement the icon processing function. Specifically, when the user wants to use the icon processing function, an input for instructing to start the icon processing function may be triggered. The input management module may be used to detect a user input event and notify the window management module of the input event. Exemplarily, the input event may be a user's touch operation (such as click, double-click, two-finger click, long press, pressure press, pressure long press, drag, one-finger swipe, two-finger swipe or drag, etc.), hover Operations or voice input operations. The window management module can be specifically used to receive input events notified by the input management module, determine the associated elements (such as association icons or association groups) triggered by the input event, and process the business, and notify the activity management module to execute the associated element's processing business corresponding to the input event And update the view according to the notification from the activity management module. The activity management module can be specifically used to perform business processing on associated elements according to input events, construct new views according to business processing scenarios, and notify the window management module to update views. And, the application group information is obtained from the group management module, or the group management module is notified to update the application group information according to the business process. The group management module can be used to manage the group information of the application, such as the correspondence between the group and the icon, the position of the group on the desktop, and the position of the icon in the group. The application management module can be used to provide information about all applications in the system, such as providing application names and application icons.
(3)、函数库层(3), function library layer
函数库层是应用程序框架的支撑,是连接应用程序框架层与Linux内核层的重要纽带。函数库层包括一些由计算机程序C语言或C++语言编译的函数库,这些函数库能被操作系统中的不同的组件使用,它们通过应用程序框架层为开发者提供服务。具体地,函数库可以包括libc函数库,它是专门为基于embedded linux的设备定制的;函数库还可以包括多媒体库(Media Framework),该库支持多种编码格式的音频或视频的回放和录制,同时支持静态图像文件,以及常见的音频或视频编码格式。函数库还包括界面管理库(Surface Manager),主要负责管理针对显示系统的访问,具体用于在执行多个应用程序时候,负责管理显示与存取操作间的互动,另外也负责2D绘图与3D绘图进行显示合成。The function library layer is the support of the application framework and an important link between the application framework layer and the Linux kernel layer. The function library layer includes some function libraries compiled by the computer program C or C ++. These function libraries can be used by different components in the operating system. They provide services to developers through the application framework layer. Specifically, the function library may include a libc function library, which is specially customized for embedded Linux-based devices; the function library may also include a multimedia library (Media Framework), which supports playback and recording of audio or video in multiple encoding formats , While supporting still image files, as well as common audio or video encoding formats. The function library also includes an interface management library (Surface Manager), which is mainly responsible for managing access to the display system. It is specifically used to manage the interaction between display and access operations when executing multiple applications. It is also responsible for 2D drawing and 3D. Drawings are composited for display.
函数库层中还可以包括其他的用于实现手机各个功能的函数库,例如:可扩展图形库(scalable graphics library,SGL):基于可扩展标记语言(extensible markup language,XML)文件的2D图形图像处理引擎;安全套接层(secure sockets layer,SSL):位于TVP/IP协议与各种应用层协议之间,为数据通讯提供支持;三维图形处理库(OpenGL/ES):3D效果的支持;轻型数据库(SQLite):关系型数据库引擎;Webkit:Web浏览器引擎;FreeType:位图及矢量字体支持;等等。The function library layer may also include other function libraries for implementing various functions of the mobile phone, for example: scalable graphics library (SGL): 2D graphic images based on extensible markup language (XML) files Processing engine; secure sockets layer (SSL): located between TVP / IP protocol and various application layer protocols to provide support for data communication; three-dimensional graphics processing library (OpenGL / ES): support for 3D effects; lightweight Database (SQLite): Relational database engine; Webkit: Web browser engine; FreeType: Bitmap and vector font support; etc.
安卓运行时(Android Runtime)是一种在 操作系统上的运行环境,是 操作系统所使用的一种新的虚拟机。在Android Runtime中,采用AOT(Ahead-Of-Time)技术,应用程序在第一次安装的时候,该应用程序的字节码就会被预先编译成机器码,让应用程序成为真正的本地应用,之后再次运行,就省去了编译这一步骤,启动和执行都会变得更加快速。 Android Runtime (Android Runtime) is a The operating environment on the operating system is A new type of virtual machine used by the operating system. In Android Runtime, AOT (Ahead-Of-Time) technology is used. When an application is first installed, the bytecode of the application is pre-compiled into machine code, making the application a real native application. , And then run it again, the compilation step is omitted, and startup and execution will become faster.
在本申请其它一些实施例中,Android Runtime也可以由核心函数库(Core Libraries)和Dalvik虚拟机(Dalvik Virtual Machine)代替。核心函数库提供了Java语言API中的大多数功能,主要通过Java原生界面(java native interface,JNI)的方式向应用程 序框架层提供调用底层程序库的接口。同时也包含了该操作系统的一些核心API,如android.os、android.net、android.media等等。Dalvik虚拟机使用一种JIT(Just-in-Time)的运行时编译的机制,每次启动一个进程都需要虚拟机在后台重新编译字节码,会对启动速度有一定的影响。每一个应用程序都运行在是一个Dalvik虚拟机中的实例中,每一个Dalvik虚拟机实例都是一个独立的进程空间。Dalvik虚拟机设计成在一个设备可以高效地运行多个虚拟机。Dalvik虚拟机可执行文件格式是.dex,dex格式是专为Dalvik设计的一种压缩格式,适合内存和处理器速度有限的系统。需要提出的是Dalvik虚拟机依赖于Linux内核提供基本功能(线程、底层内存管理)。可以理解的是,Android Runtime、Dalvik属于不同类型的虚拟机,本领域技术人员可以在不同情况下选用不同形式的虚拟机。In some other embodiments of the present application, the Android Runtime may also be replaced by a core function library (Core Libraries) and a Dalvik virtual machine (Dalvik Virtual Machine). The core function library provides most of the functions of the Java language API, and mainly provides the interface of the underlying program library to the application framework layer through the Java native interface (JNI). It also includes some core APIs of the operating system, such as android.os, android.net, android.media, and so on. The Dalvik virtual machine uses a JIT (Just-in-Time) runtime compilation mechanism. Each time a process is started, the virtual machine needs to recompile the bytecode in the background, which will have a certain impact on the startup speed. Each application runs in an instance of a Dalvik virtual machine, and each Dalvik virtual machine instance is an independent process space. Dalvik virtual machines are designed to efficiently run multiple virtual machines on one device. Dalvik virtual machine executable file format is .dex, dex format is a compression format designed for Dalvik, suitable for systems with limited memory and processor speed. What needs to be mentioned is that the Dalvik virtual machine relies on the Linux kernel to provide basic functions (threads, underlying memory management). It can be understood that Android Runtime and Dalvik belong to different types of virtual machines, and those skilled in the art can select different forms of virtual machines in different situations.
(4)、Linux内核层(4) Linux kernel layer
Linux内核层提供操作系统的核心系统服务,如安全性、内存管理、进程管理、网络协议栈和驱动模型等都基于Linux内核。Linux内核同时也作为硬件和软件栈之间的抽象层。该层有许多与电子设备相关的驱动程序,主要的驱动有:显示驱动;基于Linux的帧缓冲驱动;作为输入设备的键盘驱动;基于内存技术设备的Flash驱动;照相机驱动;音频驱动;蓝牙驱动;Wi-Fi驱动等。The Linux kernel layer provides the core system services of the operating system, such as security, memory management, process management, network protocol stack, and driver model, etc., all based on the Linux kernel. The Linux kernel also acts as an abstraction layer between the hardware and software stacks. There are many drivers related to electronic devices in this layer. The main drivers are: display driver; Linux-based frame buffer driver; keyboard driver as input device; Flash driver based on memory technology device; camera driver; audio driver; Bluetooth driver ; Wi-Fi driver and so on.
本申请实施例中的电子设备可以安装有一个或者多个应用,并在电子设备触摸屏上所显示的桌面上显示该电子设备中安装的应用的图标。其中,本申请实施例中的应用可以是嵌入式应用(即电子设备的系统应用),也可以是可下载应用。嵌入式应用是作为电子设备实现的一部分提供的应用程序。可下载应用可以是一个可以提供因特网协议多媒体子系统(internet protocol multimedia subsystem,IMS)连接的应用程序,该可下载应用可以预先安装在电子设备中的应用或可以由用户下载并安装在电子设备中的第三方应用。The electronic device in the embodiment of the present application may be installed with one or more applications, and an icon of the application installed in the electronic device is displayed on a desktop displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device. The application in the embodiment of the present application may be an embedded application (that is, a system application of an electronic device) or a downloadable application. Embedded applications are applications that are provided as part of the implementation of an electronic device. The downloadable application may be an application program that can provide an Internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) connection. The downloadable application may be an application that is pre-installed in an electronic device or may be downloaded and installed by the user in the electronic device. Third-party applications.
其中,电子设备的触摸屏可以显示桌面的一个页面或一屏。桌面可以包括多个页面(page)或多屏。其中,每个页面上可以显示或放置多个元素(element),每一屏上可以显示或放置多个元素。其中,该元素可以为应用的图标、分组(例如文件夹)或widget等。另外,电子设备中还可以保存有应用的图标与页面的对应关系以及图标与分组的对应关系,电子设备根据上述对应关系可以确定应用的图标具体显示在哪个页面的哪个分组中。并且,电子设备还可以在桌面的不同页面之间进行切换。其中,应用的图标也可以称为应用图标或简称为图标。The touch screen of the electronic device can display a page or a screen of the desktop. The desktop can include multiple pages or multiple screens. Among them, multiple elements can be displayed or placed on each page, and multiple elements can be displayed or placed on each screen. The element may be an icon, a group (for example, a folder) or a widget of an application. In addition, the electronic device may also store the correspondence between the icon of the application and the page and the correspondence between the icon and the group. The electronic device may determine which page and which group of the application icon are specifically displayed according to the above-mentioned correspondence. In addition, the electronic device can switch between different pages on the desktop. The icon of the application may also be called an application icon or simply an icon.
示例性地,如图3中的(a)和(b)所示,为电子设备触摸屏上所显示的两个GUI,这些GUI可以是该电子设备的一个页面或一屏。其中,图3的(a)中显示的GUI可以称为桌面的第一页面(the first page)300,图3的(b)中显示的GUI可以称为桌面的第二页面(the second page)309,每个页面可以包括有不同的元素。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 3, there are two GUIs displayed on the touch screen of the electronic device, and these GUIs may be one page or one screen of the electronic device. The GUI shown in FIG. 3 (a) may be referred to as the first page of the
以图3中的(a)为例说明,该GUI可以是该电子设备的桌面中的第一页面300,该第一页面300中可以包括状态栏301、可隐藏的导航栏302、时间和天气widget,还有多个应用程序的图标和分组,例如微信的图标303、相册图标304、娱乐分组305和工具分组306等。可以理解的是,在其他一些实施例中,图3中的(a)所示的第一页面300中还可以包括Dock栏,Dock栏中可以包括常用的App图标,例如打电话图 标、短信图标或联系人图标。其中Dock栏中的图标可以理解为不随用户切换页面而发生变化,例如图3(b),用户从图3(a)切换到图3(b),图3(b)中仍然显示Dock栏中的图标,例如打电话图标、短信图标或联系人图标。每个分组中可以包括多个图标,例如娱乐分组305中可以包括搜狐视频图标307、抖音图标、快手图标和虎牙图标等。其中,状态栏301中可以包括运营商的名称(例如中国移动)、时间、wifi图标、信号强度或当前的剩余电量。导航栏302中可以包括返回键(back button)308、主屏幕键(home button)314和历史任务键(menu button)。其中,导航栏302可以位于在显示屏中,也可以位于显示屏外。当导航栏302位于显示屏中,导航栏302可以是透明的,也可以基于用户的触发或经过预设的时间,隐藏导航栏302。此外,可以理解的是,在其他一些实施例中,状态栏301中还可以包括蓝牙图标、移动网络图标(例如,4G图标)、闹钟图标和外接设备图标等。当手机检测到用户的手指(或触控笔等)针对某一App图标的拖动事件后,响应于该拖动事件,手机可以移动该App图标在界面上的位置。Taking (a) in FIG. 3 as an example, the GUI may be the
其中,主屏幕键可以是实体按键,也可以是虚拟按键。用户点击主屏幕键,可以将触摸屏上显示的GUI返回到主屏幕或称主页面,该主屏幕或主页面为桌面多个页面中的其中一个页面。在本申请其他一些实施例中,主屏幕键还可以集成指纹传感器,这样用户可以在按下主屏幕键的时候,电子设备随之进行指纹采集,进而对用户身份进行确认,或者也可以是用户手指位于主屏幕键,在不按压主屏幕键的时候,可以对指纹进行采集。The home screen key can be a physical key or a virtual key. The user can return the GUI displayed on the touch screen to the home screen or home page by clicking the home screen key. The home screen or home page is one of multiple pages on the desktop. In some other embodiments of the present application, the home screen key may also integrate a fingerprint sensor, so that when the user presses the home screen key, the electronic device performs fingerprint collection to confirm the identity of the user, or the user The finger is located on the home screen key, and the fingerprint can be collected when the home screen key is not pressed.
图3中的(b)所示的GUI可以是该电子设备的桌面中的第二页面309,该第二页面309中包括影音分组310和购物分组311,以及未分组的乐视视频图标312和微博图标313等。其中,影音分组310和购物分组311为缩略图的形式。The GUI shown in (b) of FIG. 3 may be a
当电子设备在如图3的(a)所示的第一页面300中检测到用户向左滑动的操作后,如图3中的(b)所示,电子设备可以切换显示第二页面309。此外,当电子设备在如图3的(b)所示的第二页面309中检测到用户向右滑动的操作后,电子设备可以切换显示第二页面309。After the electronic device detects an operation of the user swiping to the left in the
为描述方便,本申请以下实施例中将图形用户界面(GUI)简称为界面。For the convenience of description, the graphical user interface (GUI) is simply referred to as an interface in the following embodiments of the present application.
另外,桌面上的页面还可以包括负一屏,负一屏上也可以显示元素,如显示电子设备中安装的应用的图标,通常情况下,负一屏上显示的可以是用户常用的应用的图标。其中,该负一屏可以是指用户从主屏幕向右滑动进入的界面,也可以是用户从锁屏界面向右滑动进入的界面。In addition, the page on the desktop can also include a negative screen, and elements can also be displayed on the negative screen, such as the icon of an application installed in an electronic device. Generally, the negative screen can display applications commonly used by users. icon. The negative screen may refer to an interface that the user swipes from the home screen to the right, or an interface that the user swipes to the right from the lock screen interface.
以下实施例均可以在具有上述硬件和软件结构的电子设备(例如手机或平板电脑等)中实现。以下实施例将以电子设备为手机,分组为文件夹为例,例如第一分组和第二分组都可以为文件夹,对本申请实施例提供的图标切换方法进行说明。The following embodiments can all be implemented in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone or a tablet computer) having the foregoing hardware and software structure. In the following embodiments, an electronic device is a mobile phone and a group is a folder. For example, both the first group and the second group may be folders. The icon switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application is described.
本申请实施例提供了一种图标切换方法。基于图3所示桌面的第一页面300和第二页面309,图标切换方法的具体执行过程可以参见图4A-图15。An embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method. Based on the
当电子设备检测到用户点击图3中的(a)所示的第一页面300中的娱乐分组305时,如图4A中的(a)所示,电子设备显示打开的娱乐分组305,娱乐分组305中包括抖音图标、快手图标、虎牙图标和搜狐视频图标307。当电子设备检测到用户在如 图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,触发激活(或称选中)搜狐视频图标307,并显示如图4A中的(b)所示的分组界面401,即电子设备将显示打开的娱乐分组305的界面更新为显示分组界面401。其中,压力按可以理解为用户按压搜狐视频图标307,并且压力值可以大于或等于预设的压力阈值。响应于压力按一图标(例如搜狐视频图标307),电子设备可以激活该图标,并且可以显示一分组界面(例如图4A中的(b)所示的分组界面)。可以理解的,点击操作的按压力度可以小于一预设压力阈值。与压力按类似的操作还有压力长按。压力长按是指用户按压的力度大于或者等于一预设压力阈值,且按压的时长大于或者等于预设时间阈值。When the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the
分组界面401中包括桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组,即娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307可以切换到的分组,例如工具分组306、影音分组310和购物分组311。也就是说,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307后,电子设备将显示打开的娱乐分组305的界面更新为显示有桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组的分组界面401。The
当电子设备检测到用户点击图4A的(b)中所示的影音分组310这一目标分组时,触发电子设备在影音分组310上显示选中标识402,并将搜狐视频图标307归入影音分组310。此时,电子设备在影音分组310中展示搜狐视频图标307。在一种实现方案中,当电子设备检测到用户点击图4A的(b)中所示的影音分组310之后,如图4A中的(c)所示,影音分组310的缩略图中包括搜狐视频图标307。当电子设备检测到用户点击图4A的(c)中的影音分组310时,如图4A中的(d)所示,电子设备显示打开的影音分组310,影音分组310中包括爱奇艺视频图标、腾讯视频图标、优酷视频图标和搜狐视频图标307。此时,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。When the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the target group of audio and
在另一种实现方案中,当电子设备检测到用户点击图4A的(b)中所示的影音分组310之后,如图4A中的(d)所示,电子设备可以自动显示打开的影音分组310,搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310,影音分组310中包括爱奇艺视频图标、腾讯视频图标、优酷视频图标和搜狐视频图标307。In another implementation, after the electronic device detects that the user clicks the audio /
具体的,在搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310之后,在一种实现方案中,如图4A中的(d)所示,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中最底下一行的最后一个图标的位置;在另一种实现方案中,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中最上边一行的第一个图标;在另一种实现方案中,搜狐视频图标307在应用分组310中的位置可以是电子设备随机设置的。Specifically, after the
可选的,分组界面401中的多个分组可以按照优先级顺序排列。示例性的,位于第二页面的影音分组310和购物分组311的优先级,高于位于第一页面的工具分组306的优先级。再例如,与被激活图标关联性强的分组的优先级较高。示例性的,影音分组310与被激活的搜狐视频图标307的关联性较强,因而分组界面401中显示的最上边一行的第一个分组可以是影音分组310。再例如,用户经常使用的分组(例如经常使用其中应用的分组)的优先级高。示例性的,购物分组311为用户经常使用的分组,因而分组界面401中显示的最上边一行的第一个分组可以是购物分组311。Optionally, multiple groups in the
可见,在图4A描述的分组切换过程中,用户不需要拖动搜狐视频图标307进行 切屏(即切换桌面上的页面),就可以将搜狐视频图标307从第一页面300中的娱乐分组305切换到第二页面309的影音分组310中,实现搜狐视频图标307的跨屏(即跨页面)切换分组,因而操作更为简单。It can be seen that during the group switching process described in FIG. 4A, the user does not need to drag the
需要注意的是,图4A描述的分组切换过程是以用户选择的目标分组即影音分组310,与搜狐视频图标307所在的娱乐分组305不在同一页面为例进行说明的。电子设备也可以通过本申请实施例提供的分组切换方法将搜狐视频图标307切换到与搜狐视频图标307所在分组位于同一页面(即第一页面300)的其他分组中。例如,将搜狐视频图标307切换到工具分组306中,此处对该分组切换过程不予赘述。It should be noted that the group switching process described in FIG. 4A is described by taking the user-selected target group, that is, the audio /
进一步地,在图4A中的(c)或(d)所示的搜狐视频图标307切换至影音分组310该目标分组之后,当电子设备检测到用户点击返回键308的操作后,如图4B中的(a)所示,电子设备可以显示目标分组所在的页面,即显示影音分组310所在的第二页面309。此时,第二页面309中影音分组310的缩略图中包括搜狐视频图标307。Further, after the
此外,在图4A中的(c)或(d)所示的搜狐视频图标307切换至影音分组310该目标分组之后,当电子设备检测到用户点击主屏幕键314的操作后,如图4B中的(b)所示,电子设备显示主屏幕,即电子设备显示第一页面300。此时,第一页面300中娱乐分组305的缩略图中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。In addition, after the
在搜狐视频图标切换至影音分组310之后,当电子设备检测到用户点击影音分组310中的搜狐视频图标307时,电子设备可以打开搜狐视频图标307对应的搜狐视频的应用界面。After the Sohu video icon is switched to the audio and
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,作为图4A的(a)中通过压力按搜狐视频图标307以触发激活搜狐视频图标307并显示分组界面401的一种替换方案,如图5中的(a)所示,电子设备还可以在检测到在用户拖住娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307进行晃动时,触发激活搜狐视频图标307并显示分组界面401;或者,如图5中的(b)所示,电子设备还可以在检测到用户在娱乐分组305中搜狐视频图标307所在的位置画了一个圆圈的手势时,触发激活搜狐视频图标307并显示分组界面401。可以理解的是,触发激活搜狐视频图标307并显示分组界面401的操作还可以有多种,例如用户双击搜狐视频图标307或双指点击搜狐视频图标307等,这里不再一一例举。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, as an alternative to pressing the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图6的(a)中所示的分组界面601。分组界面601中可以包括桌面上各页面上的所有分组,具体包括娱乐分组305、工具分组306、影音分组310和购物分组311。在一种具体的替换方案中,图6的(a)中所示的娱乐分组305中不显示被激活的搜狐视频图标307,影音分组310中也未显示搜狐视频图标307,在用户点击图6的(a)中所示的影音分组310后,搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310;在另一种具体的替换方案中,图6的(a)中所示的娱乐分组305中显示被激活的搜狐视频图标307,并在用户点击图6的(a)中所示的影音分组310后,娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307消失,电子设备在影音分组310中显示搜狐视频图标307。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为另一分组界面,该另一分组界面上包括桌面上与被激活的搜狐视频图标307所在的娱乐分组305不在同一页面的所有其他分组。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A above, the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,作为图4A的(b)中选中标识402的一种替换方案,选中标识402也可以替换为如图6的(b)中所示的选中标识602,或如图6的(c)中所示的选中标识603。In the packet switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, as an alternative to the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,作为图4A的(c)中用户选择一个目标分组的替换方案,用户也可以选择多个目标分组。示例性的,如图6中的(d)所示,当电子设备检测到用户点击选择影音分组310和工具分组306时,被激活的搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310和工具分组306。此时,影音分组310中包括搜狐视频图标307,工具分组306中也包括搜狐视频图标307,娱乐分组305中不包括搜狐视频图标307,即搜狐视频图标307从娱乐分组305中切换到影音分组310和工具分组306中。也就是说,电子设备可以将某个分组中的图标同时切换至多个其他分组。其中,该多个其他分组可以包括与该分组位于同一页面的分组,也可以包括与该分组位于不同页面的分组。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A above, as an alternative to the user selecting one target group in (c) of FIG. 4A, the user may also select multiple target groups. For example, as shown in (d) of FIG. 6, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks to select the audio /
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,作为图4A的(a)中用户激活一个图标的替换方案,用户也可以激活该分组中的多个图标。示例性的,在电子设备显示打开的娱乐分组305的情况下,如图7中的(a)所示,当电子设备检测到用户的触发操作(例如点击娱乐分组305中的空白位置,或者长按娱乐分组305中的任意一个图标)时,触发娱乐分组305中的图标进入待选状态。如图7中的(b)所示,若电子设备检测到用户点击搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700后,点击了确定按钮,则电子设备可以显示上述分组界面,例如可以是上述分组界面401或分组界面601,而后采用上述实施例中描述的方法将搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700一起切换到其他的分组中。示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面401中点击影音分组310后,如图8中的(a)所示,搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700进入影音分组310中,娱乐分组305中可以不再包括搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700。当电子设备检测到用户点击如图8的(a)中的影音分组310的缩略图时,如图8中的(b)所示,电子设备显示打开的影音分组310,即电子设备放大显示影音分组310。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, as an alternative to the user activating one icon in (a) of FIG. 4A, the user may also activate multiple icons in the group. Exemplarily, in a case where the electronic device displays the opened
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图9的(a)中所示的分组界面901。具体的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,触发激活搜狐视频图标307,在分组界面901的上方显示打开的娱乐分组305,在分组界面901的下方显示桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他所有分组。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面901上点击影音分组310并点击确定按钮后,在一种情况下,触发搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310,如图9中的(c)所示,影音分组310的缩略图中包括搜狐视频图标307,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307,当用户点击打开影音分组310时,如图9中的(d)所示,影音分组310中包括搜狐视频图标307;在另一种情况下,如图9中的(d)所示,电子设备直接显示打开的影音分组310,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中。When the electronic device detects that the user clicks the audio /
可选的,在电子设备显示分组界面901时,当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310所在的位置时,在一种情况下,触发搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310,如图9中的(c)所示,影音分组310的缩略图中显示有搜狐视频图 标307;在另一种情况下,如图9中的(d)所示,电子设备自动显示打开的影音分组310,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中最底下一行的最后一个分组(或最上边一行的第一个分组)的位置;在另一种情况下,电子设备自动显示打开的影音分组310,如图9中的(e)和(f)所示,当用户在影音分组310中的某一位置停止拖动并松手时,电子设备检测用户停止拖动时图标所处的位置,根据该位置在影音分组310中设置搜狐视频图标307,并自动排列影音分组310中的其他图标。Optionally, when the electronic device displays the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图10的(a)中所示的分组界面1001。具体的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,可以触发激活搜狐视频图标307,在分组界面1001上显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组,隐藏娱乐分组305及娱乐分组305中搜狐视频图标307以外的其他图标。可以理解的,在分组界面1001上也可以显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上的分组,包括娱乐分组305。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
参见图10中的(b),当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310所在的位置时,如图10中的(c)或(d)所示,搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310。Referring to (b) in FIG. 10, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图11的(a)中所示的分组界面1101。具体的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,电子设备在分组界面1101的上方显示娱乐分组305,在分组界面1101的下方显示桌面上各页面的缩略图,各页面的缩略图中包括当前页面上包括的分组和图标。示例性的,如图11中的(a)所示,分组界面1101中包括第一页面的缩略图1102和第二页面的缩略图1103。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
如图11中的(b)和(c)所示,当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至第二页面的缩略图1103位置时,电子设备放大显示第二页面309。当电子设备检测到用户未松手并继续将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310的位置时,参见图11中的(d),搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310,影音分组310的缩略图中包括搜狐视频图标307;或者参见图11中的(e),电子设备自动显示打开的影音分组310,影音分组310中包括搜狐视频图标307。此时,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。As shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 11, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
或者,当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至第二页面的缩略图1103位置时,电子设备放大显示第二页面309的界面。当电子设备检测到用户未松手并继续将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310的位置时,电子设备可以自动显示打开的影音分组310。当用户在影音分组310中的某一位置停止拖动并松手时,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中。具体的,电子设备检测用户停止拖动时图标所处的位置,根据该位置在影音分组310中可以设置搜狐视频图标307,并可以自动排列影音分组310中的其他图标。Alternatively, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图12的(a)中所示的分组界面1201。具体的,当电子设备检测 到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,电子设备在分组界面1201的上方显示娱乐分组305,在分组界面1201的下方显示桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组中的一部分。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面1201上向左或向右滑动时,切换分组界面1201下方显示的分组,并显示分组界面1202。与分组界面1201相比,分组界面1202的上方仍显示娱乐分组305,分组界面1202的下方显示的分组包括未在分组界面1201中显示的其他分组。可以理解的,分组界面1202的下方显示的分组也可以包括娱乐分组305。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
例如,当电子设备检测到用户在图12中的(a)所示的分组界面1201上向右滑动时,如图12中的(b)所示,电子设备显示的分组界面1202中包括分组界面1201中未显示的影音分组310。当电子设备检测到用户点击影音分组310并点击确定按钮后,搜狐视频图标307从娱乐分组305切换至影音分组310中。For example, when the electronic device detects that the user swipes right on the
可以理解的是,图12的(a)中所示的分组界面1201中的多个分组是以左右排列为例进行说明的,在其他实施方式中,分组界面1201中的多个分组也可以是上下排列的,当用户向上或向下滑动时,电子设备切换显示其他分组。It can be understood that multiple groups in the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图13的(a)或(c)中所示的分组界面1301。具体的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,电子设备在分组界面1301中显示一个打开的分组,该分组是桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的一个其他分组,例如该分组为工具分组306。当电子设备检测到用户切换分组的操作时,在分组界面上切换显示另一个打开的分组。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在图13中的(a)所示的分组界面1301上向左滑动时,电子设备将显示工具分组306切换为显示影音分组310。当电子设备检测到用户点击图13的(b)中的确定按钮后,搜狐视频图标307从娱乐分组305切换到影音分组310中。此外,在图13的(b)中,当电子设备检测到用户向左滑动时,电子设备切换显示下一个分组;当用户向右滑动时,电子设备切换显示上一个分组(即工具分组306)。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user slides to the left on the
示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户点击图13中的(c)所示的分组界面1301中的下一个按钮后,电子设备将显示工具分组306切换为显示影音分组310。当电子设备检测到用户点击图13的(d)中的确定按钮时,搜狐视频图标307从娱乐分组305切换到影音分组310中。此外,在图13的(d)中,当电子设备检测到用户点击“下一个”按钮时,电子设备切换显示下一个分组;当用户点击“上一个”按钮时,电子设备切换显示上一个分组(即工具分组306)。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks the next button in the
上述图4A-图13描述的图标处理过程是以被激活图标为桌面分组中的搜狐视频图标307为例进行说明的,可以理解的是,采用上述图4A-图13描述的图标处理过程也可以将桌面任意一个分组中任意被激活的图标切换到另一个已创建的分组中,这里不予赘述。The icon processing process described in the above FIG. 4A to FIG. 13 is described by using the activated icon as the
以下图14A-图15描述的图标处理过程将仍以桌面分组中的搜狐视频图标307为例,来说明电子设备还可以将桌面分组中被激活的图标切换到一个新创建的分组中,即将被激活的图标与其他图标合并成新的分组。The icon processing process described in Figures 14A-15 below will still take the
在上述图4A描述的分组切换方案中,电子设备在图4A的(b)中显示的分组界面401可以替换为如图14A的(a)或(d)中所示的分组界面1401。与分组界面401中仅包括分组不同,分组界面1401中可以包括桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组,以及桌面各页面上的未分类图标;或者,分组界面1401中可以包括桌面各页面上所有的分组,以及桌面各页面上的未分类图标。其中,未分类图标是指直接放置在桌面上,未划分至任何一个分组中的图标。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面1401中选择至少一个未分类图标时,电子设备将被激活的图标和用户在分组界面1401中选择的至少一个未分类图标合并一个新的分组。In the group switching scheme described in FIG. 4A described above, the
示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,触发激活搜狐视频图标307,将显示打开的娱乐分组305的界面更新为显示分组界面1401,并在如图14A的(a)中所示的分组界面1401上显示桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组,以及桌面各页面上的未分类图标,即显示工具分组306、购物分组311和影音分组310,以及未分类的乐视视频图标312、QQ图标、股票图标等。其中,分组界面1401上可以显示有提示信息“请选择目标元素”,该目标元素可以指目标分组或目标未分类图标。当电子设备检测到用户选择图14A的(a)中所示的未分类的乐视视频图标312这一目标未分类图标时,电子设备将搜狐视频图标307和乐视视频图标312组合成一个新的分组1402,电子设备在新的分组1402中展示搜狐视频图标307和乐视视频图标312。在一种情况下,如图14A中的(b)所示,电子设备可以显示新的分组1402的缩略图;在另一种情况下,如图14A中的(c)所示,电子设备可以显示打开后的新的分组1402。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user presses the
示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中压力按搜狐视频图标307时,触发激活搜狐视频图标307,在如图14A的(d)中所示的分组界面1401的上方显示搜狐视频图标307,隐藏娱乐分组图标305和娱乐分组305中的其他图标,并在分组界面1401的下方显示桌面各页面上处娱乐分组以外的所有其他分组,以及桌面各页面上的未分类图标。当电子设备检测到用户在图14A的(d)所示分组界面1401中将搜狐视频图标307拖动至乐视视频图标312的位置时,电子设备确定用户选择了乐视视频图标312,乐视视频图标312为目标未分类图标,并如图14A中的(b)或(c)所示,电子设备将搜狐视频图标307和乐视视频图标312组合成一个新的分组1402。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user presses the
可以理解的,本申请实施例对新的分组1402设置在桌面上的哪一页面不作具体限制。例如,在图14A中的(b)或(c)所示的电子设备组成新的分组1402之后,若电子设备检测到用户点击返回键308的操作,则在一种实现方案中,如图14B中的(a)所示,电子设备在乐视视频图标312所在的第二页面309上显示新的分组1402,新的分组1402中包括乐视视频图标312和搜狐视频图标307;在另一种实现方案中,如图14B中的(b)所示,电子设备在搜狐视频图标307所在的第一页面300上显示新的分组1402;在另一种实现方案中,电子设备在预设的一个页面上显示新的分组1402;在另一种实现方案中,电子设备在桌面最右侧的一个页面上显示新的分组;在另一种实现方案中,电子设备在空闲区域(未被分组、图标或widget占用的区域)最多的页面上显示新的分组1402。It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit which page of the
可见,在图14A描述的图标处理过程中,用户不需要拖动搜狐视频图标307进行切屏(即切换桌面上的页面),就可以将位于第一页面300的娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307与第二页面309上的未分类的乐视视频图标312跨屏组合成新的分组,因而操作更为简单。It can be seen that during the icon processing process described in FIG. 14A, the user does not need to drag the
需要注意的是,以上是以用户选择的目标为未分类图标即乐视视频图标312,与搜狐视频图标307所在的娱乐分组305不在同一页面为例进行说明的。电子设备也可以通过图14A所描述的将与搜狐视频图标307所在分组位于同一页面(即第一页面300)的未分类图标与搜狐视频图标307组合成新的分组。例如,将搜狐视频图标307与第一页面300上的微信图标303组合成新的分组,此处对该成组过程不予赘述。It should be noted that the above description is based on the example that the target selected by the user is an unclassified icon, that is, the
需要说明的是,图14A是以用户在分组界面1401中选择一个未分类图标(即乐视视频图标312)为例进行说明的,当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面1401中选择多个未分类图标时,电子设备将搜狐视频图标307和用户所选择的多个未分类图标组合成一个新的分组,电子设备在新的分组中展示搜狐视频图标307和所选择的该多个未分类图标。示例性的,作为一种替换方案,分组界面1401可以替换为如图14C中的(a)所示的分组界面1403;参见图14C中的(b),当用户在分组界面1403上选择乐视视频图标312和相册图标304时,电子设备将搜狐视频图标307、用户所选择的乐视视频图标312和相册图标304组合成一个新的分组1404,参见图14C中的(c),电子设备在新的分组1404中展示搜狐视频图标307、乐视视频图标312和相册图标304。It should be noted that FIG. 14A is based on the user selecting an unclassified icon in the grouping interface 1401 (ie, LeTV video icon 312) as an example. When the electronic device detects that the user selects multiple unclassified icons in the
在本申请实施例中,当分组界面上还包括未分类图标时,分组界面上的待显示元素较多,该待显示元素包括桌面各页面上未分类图标以及桌面各页面上的所有分组(或者除激活图标所在分组以外的其他分组)。在一种情况下,电子设备可以缩小显示分组界面上的元素,以尽量在一个界面上显示所有待显示的元素。在另一种情况下,当无法在一个界面上显示所有待显示的元素时,作为图4A的(b)中所示的分组界面401的一种替换方案,电子设备可以如图15中的(a)所示的分组界面1501,当电子设备在分组界面1501中检测到用户向上滑动的操作时,如图15中的(b)所示,电子设备可以在分组界面1502中显示分组界面1501中未显示的待显示元素,例如微博图标、百度图标和乐视视频图标等。In the embodiment of the present application, when the grouping interface further includes unclassified icons, there are more elements to be displayed on the grouping interface, and the to-be-displayed elements include unclassified icons on each page of the desktop and all groups (or Groups other than the one the activation icon is in). In one case, the electronic device may reduce the elements on the display grouping interface to display all the elements to be displayed on one interface as much as possible. In another case, when all the elements to be displayed cannot be displayed on one interface, as an alternative to the
可以理解的是,以上图14A-图15描述的图标处理过程将仍以桌面分组中的搜狐视频图标307为例进行说明的,对于桌面分组中其他任意被激活图标与其他图标合并成新的分组的过程可以参照上述搜狐视频图标307的处理过程,这里不予赘述。It can be understood that the icon processing process described in FIG. 14A to FIG. 15 will still be described by taking the
本申请另一实施例提供了一种图标切换方法,可以通过设置分组控件将一个分组中的图标切换到另一个分组中。其中,另一分组可以是已创建的分组,也可以是新创建的分组。以下将在上述图4A-图15所描述的分组切换方法的基础上,通过图16A-图18所举示例为例,对本申请实施例提供的分组切换方法进行说明。Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, and an icon in one group can be switched to another group by setting a group control. Among them, another group may be an already-created group or a newly-created group. Based on the packet switching method described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 15 above, the packet switching method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the examples shown in FIGS. 16A to 18 as examples.
在上述图4A-图15所描述的图标处理过程中,当电子设备检测到用户在如图4A的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中(也即如图16A的(a)中所示的娱乐分组305中)压力按搜狐视频图标307时;或者,当电子设备检测到用户在如图5的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中晃动搜狐视频图标307时;或者,当电子设备检测到用户在如图5的(b)所示的娱乐分组305中搜狐视频图标307位置画一个圆圈时;或者,当电子设备检测 到用户通过其他操作激活搜狐视频图标307时,触发电子设备显示设置分组控件。In the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 15 above, when the electronic device detects that the user is in the
示例性的,当搜狐视频图标307被激活时,可以触发电子设备显示如图16A中的(b)所示的菜单列表。该菜单列表中包括更改分组控件1601、分享控件和卸载控件等,该分享控件用于分享应用,该卸载控件用于卸载应用,该更改分组控件1601即为设置分组控件。当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至分享控件位置时,用户可以通过微信等应用程序或者通过wifi等网络连接将搜狐视频应用分享给他人;当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至卸载控件位置时,电子设备可以卸载搜狐视频应用。可以理解的,在一个图标,例如搜狐视频图标307被激活时,可以触发电子设备显示设置分组控件,例如图16A(b)中的更改分组控件。For example, when the
其中,控件可以是一种软件组件,包含在应用程序中,控制着该应用程序处理的数据以及关于这些数据的交互操作,用户可以通过直接操作(direct manipulation)来与控件交互,从而对应用程序的有关信息进行读取或者编辑。一般而言,控件可以包括图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面单元。Among them, the control may be a software component, which is contained in the application program and controls the data processed by the application program and the interactive operations on the data. The user can interact with the control through direct manipulation to direct the application program. Read or edit related information. Generally speaking, controls can include icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface units.
在一种情况下,参见图16A中的(c),当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组控件1601位置时,触发电子设备可以隐藏娱乐分组305中除搜狐视频图标307以外的其他图标,在如图16A中的(d)所示的分组界面1602上显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组。参见图16A中的(e),当电子设备检测到用户在图16A中的(c)所示的拖动过程后未松手,并持续将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310中时,如图16A中的(f)所示,搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310。此时,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。In one case, referring to (c) in FIG. 16A, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
在另一种情况下,参见图16A中的(c),当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组控件1601位置时,触发电子设备在如图16A中的(d)所示的分组界面1602上显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上娱乐分组305以外的其他分组。当用户松开搜狐视频图标307后,如图16B中的(a)所示,电子设备隐藏搜狐图标307,分组界面中的分组为待选状态。如图16B中的(b)所示,当电子设备检测到用户点击选中影音分组310,并点击确定按钮后,参见图16A中的(f),搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310。此时,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。In another case, referring to (c) in FIG. 16A, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
在另一种情况下,参见图16A中的(c),当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组控件1601位置时,触发电子设备隐藏娱乐分组305和菜单列表,并在如图16B中的(a)所示的分组界面1602上显示桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组,且分组界面1602中的分组为待选状态。如图16B中的(b)所示,当电子设备检测到用户点击选中影音分组310,并点击确定按钮后,参见图16A中的(f),搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310。此时,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307。In another case, referring to (c) in FIG. 16A, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the
在搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310之后,电子设备还可以采用上述图4A-图15中描述的展示方式在影音分组310中展示搜狐视频图标。示例性的,在图16A的(e)所示的拖动操作或在图16B的(b)所示的点击确定按钮的操作之后,与图4A的(c)中所示的展示方式类似,如图16A中的(f)所示,影音分组310的缩略图中包括搜狐 视频图标307。或者,在图16A的(e)所示的拖动操作或在图16B的(b)所示的点击确定按钮的操作之后,与图4A的(d)中的展示方式类似,电子设备可以直接显示打开的影音分组310,影音分组310中包括搜狐视频图标307。After the
可以理解的是,设置分组控件也可以位于界面的其他位置,例如位于屏幕的底部,或者位于被激活的图标的右侧等。示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户通过压力按娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307等操作方式激活搜狐视频图标307时,如图17中的(a)所示,电子设备在搜狐视频图标307的右侧显示菜单列表,该菜单列表中包括更改分组控件1701。再示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户通过压力按娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307等操作方式激活搜狐视频图标307时,如图17的(b)中所示,电子设备显示一个悬浮球1702,该悬浮球1702即为设置分组控件。当电子设备检测到用户将该悬浮球1702拖动至搜狐视频图标307位置时,电子设备可以显示分组界面1602,该分组界面1602可以是图16A的(d)显示的界面或图16B的(a)所示的界面。It can be understood that the setting group control can also be located at other positions of the interface, for example, at the bottom of the screen, or to the right of the activated icon, and so on. Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user activates the
需要说明的是,在申请实施例中,分组界面1602还可以与图4A-图15中描述的分组界面401、分组界面601、分组界面901、分组界面1001、分组界面1101、分组界面1201、分组界面1301、分组界面1401、分组界面1501或分组界面1601相同。例如,当分组界面1602为分组界面401时,在电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组1601之后,可以在分组界面401中显示桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the application, the
当分组界面1602为图4A-图15中描述的不同分组界面时,用户可以针对不同分组界面采用图4A-图15描述的相关操作选择目标分组,从而使得被激活的图标进入目标分组。例如,当分组界面1602为图9的(a)所示的分组界面901时,用户可以通过点击影音分组310并点击确定按钮的方式,选择影音分组310作为目标分组,从而将被激活的搜狐视频图标307归入影音分组310中。再例如,当分组界面1602为图9的(b)所示的分组界面901时,用户可以通过将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310位置的方式选择影音分组310作为目标分组,从而将被激活的搜狐视频图标307归入影音分组310中。When the
可以理解的是,与图4A-图15中描述的分组界面相同,分组界面1602上也可以包括桌面各页面上的未分类图标。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面1602上选择一个的未分类图标时,电子设备将被激活的图标与在分组界面1602上选择的未分类图标合并成一个新的分组。示例性的,分组界面1602具体可以是图14A中的(a)所示的分组界面1401,当电子设备检测到用户选择图分组界面1402中所示的未分类的乐视视频图标312这一目标未分类图标时,电子设备将搜狐视频图标307和乐视视频图标312组合成一个新的分组1402,电子设备在新的分组1402中展示搜狐视频图标307和乐视视频图标312。It can be understood that, similar to the grouping interface described in FIGS. 4A-15, the
此外,作为上述设置分组控件的一种替换方案,设置分组控件也可以是一个缓冲区。用户可以通过将至少一个被激活图标拖动至该缓冲区来触发显示上述分组界面1602。当拖动至缓冲区的被激活图标包括多个时,用户可以将缓冲区中的每个被激活图标分别拖动至各自对应的目标元素(包括目标分组或目标未分类图标)的位置;或者,用户也可以将缓冲区中的多个被激活图标一起拖动至目标元素所在的位置,从而 将被激活图标切换至目标分组,或者将被激活图标与目标未分类图标合并成新的分组。当设置分组控件为缓存区时,分组界面1602与上述图4A-图15描述的各分组界面的不同之处在于,分组界面1602除了包括上述图4A-图15描述的各分组界面上的内容之外还包括该缓冲区。In addition, as an alternative to setting the grouping control, the setting grouping control may also be a buffer. The user can trigger the display of the
示例性的,图16A的(a)中的更改分组控件1601可以替换为如图18中的(a)所示的缓冲区1801。如图18中的(b)所示,当电子设备检测到用户将娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700拖动到缓冲区1801,触发显示分组界面1602,该分组界面1602具体可以是图18中的(c)所示的分组界面1802。如图18的(c)所示,当电子设备检测到用户将缓冲区1801中的搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700拖动至影音分组310的位置时,搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700进入影音分组310,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307和虎牙图标700。或者,参见图18中的(d),当电子设备检测到用户将搜狐视频图标307从缓冲区1801中拖动至影音分组310位置时,搜狐视频图标307进入影音分组310,娱乐分组305中不再包括搜狐视频图标307;当电子设备检测到用户将虎牙图标700从缓冲区1801中拖动至工具分组306位置时,虎牙图标700进入工具分组306,娱乐分组305中不再包括虎牙图标700。Exemplarily, the
此外,本申请实施例的图16A-图18主要是以桌面分组中的搜狐视频图标307为例进行说明的,对于桌面分组中其他任意被激活图标通过设置分组控件切换到另一分组中的过程,可以参照本申请实施例中对搜狐视频图标307的处理过程,这里不予赘述。In addition, FIG. 16A to FIG. 18 in the embodiment of the present application are mainly described by using the
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图19所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 19, the method may include:
1901、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一应用图标。1901. The electronic device displays a first page. The first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
示例性的,第一页面可以为如图3中的(a)所示的界面301,第一分组可以是图3中的(a)所示界面301中的娱乐分组305,第一应用图标可以是如图3中的(a)所示的娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307。Exemplarily, the first page may be the
1902、电子设备响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。1902. The electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
其中,用户对第一分组的操作可以是用户对第一分组的点击操作。示例性的,打开的第一分组可以为如图4A中的(a)所示的打开的娱乐分组305。The user's operation on the first group may be a user's click operation on the first group. Exemplarily, the opened first group may be the opened
1903、电子设备响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。1903. The electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
示例性的,用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作可以为,对娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307的长按操作、或者如图16A中的(a)所示的对娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307的压力按操作,或者如图5中的(a)所示的对娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307的晃动操作,或者如图5中的(b)所示的用户在娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307的位置画一个圆圈的手势操作等。Exemplarily, the operation performed by the user on the first application icon in the opened first group may be a long-press operation on the
示例性的,设置分组控件可以是如图16A中的(b)所示的更改分组控件1601;或者,可以是如图17的(a)所示的更改分组控件1701;或者,可以是如图17的(b) 所示的设置分组悬浮球1702;或者,也可以是如图18的(a)所示的缓冲区1801等。Exemplarily, the setting group control may be a
1904、电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。1904. The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
示例性的,用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作可以参见图16A的(c)中,用户拖动搜狐视频图标307(即第一应用图标)至更改分组控件1601(即设置分组控件)的操作。Exemplarily, the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 16A (c). The user drags the Sohu video icon 307 (the first application icon) to the change grouping control 1601 (that is, setting the grouping control) Controls).
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图16A中的(d)所示的界面1602,或如图14A的(d)中所示的分组界面1401等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be the
1905、电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。1905. The electronic device responds to the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second For the operation of two groups, the first application icon is located in the second group.
示例性的,分组界面为图16A中的(d)所示的界面,用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作可以参见图16A的(e)中,用户继续拖动搜狐视频图标307至影音分组310(即第二分组)位置的操作。响应于该操作,如图16A的(f)所示,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface is the interface shown in (d) in FIG. 16A. For the operation that the user continues to drag the first application icon to the second group, see (e) in FIG. 16A. The user continues to drag the Sohu video icon The operation from 307 to the position of the audio / video packet 310 (ie, the second packet). In response to this operation, as shown in (f) of FIG. 16A, the
再示例性的,分组界面为图14A中的(d)所示的界面,用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作可以为图14A中,用户继续拖动搜狐视频图标307至乐视视频图标312(即第二应用图标)位置的操作。响应于该操作,如图14A中的(b)或(c)所示,搜狐视频图标307与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组1402,即搜狐视频图标307切换至新的分组1402中。As another example, the grouping interface is the interface shown in (d) of FIG. 14A. The operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon may be the operation shown in FIG. 14A. The user continues to drag the
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二应用图标的位置以组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the position of the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface to form A new group, thereby switching the first application icon into the new group.
在图19所描述的方案中,可选地,电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,可以包括:电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。这样,电子设备可以根据用户在第二分组中停止拖动图标的落点位置,在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。In the solution described in FIG. 19, optionally, the electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, which may include: the electronic device responds to the user The operation of continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the operation is performed in the second group according to the target position The first application icon is displayed. In this way, the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
示例性的,第二分组可以为影音分组310,第一应用图标可以为搜狐视频图标307,电子设备响应于用户继续拖动搜狐视频图标307至影音分组310中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在影音分组310中显示搜狐视频图标307的过程,可以参见图9中的(e)和(f)所示的过程。Exemplarily, the second group may be the audio and
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图20所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 20, the method may include:
2001、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一 应用图标。2001. The electronic device displays a first page. The first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
2002、电子设备响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。2002. The electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
2003、电子设备响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。In 2003, the electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
关于步骤2001-2003的说明可以参见上述步骤1901-1903中的描述,此处不予赘述。For the description of steps 2001-2003, refer to the descriptions in steps 1901-1903 above, which will not be repeated here.
2004、电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。In 2004, the electronic device responds to the user dragging the first application icon to the set group control, and displays a group interface. The group interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group.
示例性的,用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作可以参见图16A的(c)中,用户拖动搜狐视频图标307(即第一应用图标)至更改分组控件1601(即设置分组控件)的操作。Exemplarily, the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can be seen in FIG. 16A (c). The user drags the Sohu video icon 307 (that is, the first application icon) to the change grouping control 1601 (that is, setting the grouping control). Controls).
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图16B中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图14A的(a)中所示的界面1401,或者如图4A中的(c)所示的界面,或者如图9中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图9中的(b)所示的界面,或者如图10中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图11中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图12中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图13中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图14C中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图18中的(d)所示的界面等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, or an
2005、电子设备响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。In 2005, the electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group .
示例性的,分组界面为如图16B中的(a)所示的界面,用户对第二分组的操作为如图16B的(b)所示的用户点击影音分组310(即第二分组)以及点击确定按钮的操作。响应于该操作,如图16A的(f)所示,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, and the operation of the user on the second group is as shown in (b) of FIG. 16B, the user clicks on the audio / video group 310 (ie, the second group) and Click the OK button. In response to this operation, as shown in (f) of FIG. 16A, the
再示例性的,分组界面为如图14A中的(a)所示的界面,用户对第二应用图标的操作为如图14A的(a)所示的用户点击乐视视频图标312(即第二应用图标)的操作。响应于该操作,如图14A的(b)或(c)所示,搜狐视频图标307与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组。As another example, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A, and the operation of the second application icon by the user is as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A, when the user clicks the LeTV video icon 312 (that is, the second Application icon). In response to this operation, as shown in (b) or (c) of FIG. 14A, the
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon in the first group can be activated by the user's operation, and the set group control is displayed. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can easily switch the first application icon in the first grouping to the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface. The two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
在图20描述的方案中,可选地,电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件后松手的操作,分组界面中的元素处于待选状态。这样,可以方便用户从分组界面中选择第二分组或第二应用图标。示例性的,如图16B的(a)所示,分组界面中的所有分组的右下角显示有空白的选择框,用于表明这些分组处于待选状态。In the solution described in FIG. 20, optionally, the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon by the user to set the grouping control, and the element in the grouping interface is in a standby state. In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface. Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, a blank selection box is displayed in the lower right corner of all the groups in the grouping interface to indicate that these groups are in a candidate state.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图21所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 21, the method may include:
2101、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一分组,第一分组中包括第一 应用图标。2101: The electronic device displays a first page. The first page includes a first group, and the first group includes a first application icon.
2102、电子设备响应于用户对第一分组的操作,显示打开的第一分组。2102. The electronic device displays the opened first group in response to a user operation on the first group.
2103、电子设备响应于用户对打开的第一分组中第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。2103. The electronic device displays a setting group control in response to a user operation on the first application icon in the opened first group.
关于步骤2101-2103的说明可以参见上述步骤1901-1903中的描述,此处不予赘述。For the description of steps 2101-2103, refer to the descriptions in steps 1901-1903 above, which will not be repeated here.
2104、电子设备响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。2104. The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user operation for setting a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
示例性的,用户对设置分组控件的操作可以为,如图17中的(a)所示的用户对更改分组控件1701(即设置分组控件)的点击操作;或者,如图17中的(b)所示,用户将设置分组悬浮球1702(即设置分组控件)拖动至搜狐视频图标307(即第一应用图标)位置的操作等。Exemplarily, the operation of the user to set the grouping control may be, as shown in (a) of FIG. 17, the user's click operation on changing the grouping control 1701 (ie, setting the grouping control); or, as shown in (b) of FIG. 17 ), The user drags the setting group hoverball 1702 (that is, the setting group control) to the position of the Sohu video icon 307 (that is, the first application icon), and the like.
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图16B的(a)所示的界面,或者如图18中的(d)所示的界面,或者如图4A中的(c)所示的界面,或者如图9中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图9中的(b)所示的界面,或者如图10中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图11中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图12中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图13中的(a)所示的界面,或者如图14A中的(a)所示的界面,或如图14C中的(a)所示的界面等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, or the interface shown in (d) of FIG. 18, or the interface shown in (c) of FIG. 4A, or The interface shown in (a) of FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 9 or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 10 or the interface shown in (a) of FIG. 11 The interface shown in FIG. 12 is as shown in FIG. 12 (a), or as shown in FIG. 13 (a), or as shown in FIG. 14A (a), or as shown in FIG. 14C. (A), etc.
2105、电子设备响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。2105. The electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图14A中的(a)所示的界面1401,第二应用图标可以是图14A的(a)所示的乐视视频图标312,用户对第二应用图标的操作可以是如图14A中的(a)所示的用户点击乐视视频图标312的操作。响应于该操作,如图14A中的(b)或(c)所示,搜狐视频图标307与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组1402。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be the
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图16B的(a)所示的界面,第二分组可以是如图16B的(b)所示的影音分组310,用户对第二分组的操作可以是如图16B中的(b)所示的点击影音分组310,而后点击确定按钮的操作。响应于该操作,如图16A中的(f)所示,搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 16B, and the second grouping may be an audio /
在该方案中,通过用户对第一分组中的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,通过对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating the first application icon in the first group, the first application icon can be activated and the grouping control is displayed. By operating the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon in the first group to the second group displayed on the group interface, or facilitates the user to create a new one composed of the first application icon in the first group and the second application icon displayed on the group interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
在图19-图21描述的方案中,分组界面可以包括桌面上除第一分组以外的其他分组。这样,可以方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到除第一分组以外的其他分组中。示例性的,分组界面可以是如图4A中的(b)所示的界面,分组界面包括桌面上除娱乐分组305(即第一分组)以外的其他分组。In the solutions described in FIGS. 19-21, the grouping interface may include other groups on the desktop except the first group. In this way, the user can conveniently switch the first application icon in the first group to a group other than the first group. Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (b) of FIG. 4A, and the grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop except the entertainment group 305 (ie, the first group).
或者,在图19-图21描述的方案中,分组界面可以包括桌面上除第一分组以外的其他分组和桌面上的应用图标。这样,可以方便用户将第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到除第一分组以外的其他分组中,或者将第一分组中的第一应用图标与桌面上的应 用图标组成新的分组。示例性的,分组界面可以是如图14A中的(a)所示的界面,分组界面包括桌面上除娱乐分组305(即第一分组)以外的其他分组和桌面上的应用图标。Alternatively, in the solutions described in FIGS. 19-21, the grouping interface may include other groups on the desktop other than the first group and application icons on the desktop. In this way, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon in the first group to a group other than the first group, or to form a new group with the first application icon in the first group and the application icon on the desktop. Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 14A. The grouping interface includes other groups on the desktop other than the entertainment group 305 (ie, the first group) and application icons on the desktop.
本申请另一实施例提供了一种图标切换方法,可以将桌面上被激活的未分类图标(不在分组中)归入一个已创建的分组中,或者,将桌面上被激活的未分类图标与其他未归类图标合并成一个新的分组。该方法的执行过程与上述图4A-图18中描述的图标处理过程类似,不同之处在于:被激活的图标不在分组中而直接位于桌面上,因而用户不需要打开分组后再激活图标,而可以在桌面上直接激活图标,进而触发显示分组界面。示例性的,当采用与图4A描述的过程类似的方法时,用户不用在桌面上打开娱乐分组305之后再在娱乐分组305中激活搜狐视频图标307,而可以直接在桌面上激活一个未分类图标。本申请实施例提供的方法中的其他操作流程与上述图4A-图18中描述的图标处理过程相同,可以参照上文中的具体阐述。Another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can classify activated unclassified icons (not in a group) on the desktop into an already created group, or group activated unclassified icons on the desktop with Other uncategorized icons are merged into a new group. The execution process of this method is similar to the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18 above, except that the activated icon is not in the group but directly on the desktop, so the user does not need to open the group and then activate the icon. You can activate the icon directly on the desktop to trigger the display of the grouping interface. Exemplarily, when a method similar to the process described in FIG. 4A is adopted, the user does not need to activate the
例如,与图4A-图18中描述的图标处理过程类似,电子设备也可以通过设置分组控件将被激活的未分类图标归入一个已创建的分组中。示例性的,参见图22中的(a),桌面第一页面300上包括未分类的卡包图标2201。当电子设备检测到用户压力按第一页面300上的卡包图标2201(或检测到用户通过其他操作激活卡包图标2201)时,触发电子设备在第一页面300的基础上显示设置分组控件,该设置分组控件具体可以是图22的(b)中所示的合并至分组控件2202。在一种情况下,参见图22中的(b),当电子设备检测到用户将卡包图标2201拖动至合并至分组控件2202位置时,电子设备可以自动显示如图22中的(c)所示的分组界面。当电子设备检测到用户将卡包图标2201继续拖动至购物分组311位置时,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201进入购物分组311。此时,桌面上不再直接显示卡包图标2201。其中,直接显示卡包图标2201是指,在桌面的页面上显示卡包图标2201,而不是在页面上显示的分组的缩略图中显示该卡包图标2201。For example, similar to the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18, the electronic device can also group activated unclassified icons into an already created group by setting a group control. For example, referring to (a) in FIG. 22, the
在另一种情况下,参见图22中的(b),当电子设备检测到用户将卡包图标2201拖动至合并至分组控件2202位置并松手后,电子设备显示如图22中的(e)所示的分组界面。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面上点击选择购物分组311时,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201进入购物分组311。此时,桌面上不再直接显示卡包图标2201。In another case, referring to (b) in FIG. 22, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 to the position merged into the
或者,该设置分组控件具体可以是图22的(f)中所示的合并至分组控件,当电子设备检测到用户点击合并至分组控件时,电子设备可以显示如图22中的(e)所示的分组界面。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面上点击选择购物分组311时,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201进入购物分组311。此时,桌面上不再直接显示卡包图标2201。Alternatively, the setting grouping control may specifically be the merge into grouping control shown in (f) of FIG. 22. When the electronic device detects that the user clicks to merge into the grouping control, the electronic device may display the location as shown in (e) of FIG. 22. The grouping interface shown below. When the electronic device detects that the user clicks and selects the
可以理解的是,本申请实施例中的分组界面还可以是图4A-图18中描述的其他形式的分组界面,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that the grouping interface in the embodiment of the present application may also be other types of grouping interfaces described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18, and details are not described herein again.
也就是说,用户不需要拖动图标2201切屏(即切换桌面的页面),就可以将第一页面300上的卡包图标2201归入桌面另一页面的购物分组311中,实现桌面上未分类图标的跨屏归组,因而用户的操作更为简单。In other words, the user does not need to drag the icon 2201 to cut the screen (that is, to switch the page of the desktop), and the card package icon 2201 on the
再例如,与图4A-图18中描述的图标处理过程类似,电子设备也可以通过设置分组控件将被激活的未分类图标与另一个未分类图标合并成一个新的分组。示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在图22的(b)所示的界面上将卡包图标2201拖动至合并至分组控件2202位置,电子设备显示如图23的(a)所示的分组界面,当电子设备检测到用户将卡包图标2201保持拖动至乐视视频图标312位置时,参见图23中的(b),电子设备将卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312合并成新的分组2301。For another example, similar to the icon processing process described in FIG. 4A to FIG. 18, the electronic device may also combine the activated unclassified icon with another unclassified icon into a new group by setting a grouping control. Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the position where it is merged into the
再示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在图22的(b)所示的界面上将卡包图标2201拖动至合并至分组控件2202位置并松手后,电子设备可以显示如图23中的(c)所示的分组界面,当电子设备检测到用户点击乐视视频图标312的操作时,参见图23中的(b),电子设备将卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312合并成新的分组2301。As another example, when the electronic device detects that the user drags the card package icon 2201 on the interface shown in (b) of FIG. 22 to the position where it is merged into the
再示例性的,当电子设备检测到用户在图22的(f)所示的界面上点击合并至分组控件时,电子设备显示如图23中的(c)所示的分组界面,当电子设备检测到用户点击乐视视频图标312的操作时,参见图23中的(b),电子设备将卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312合并成新的分组2301。For another example, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks and merges into a grouping control on the interface shown in FIG. 22 (f), the electronic device displays the grouping interface shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and when the electronic device When an operation of the user clicking the
也就是说,用户不需要拖动卡包图标2201进行切屏(即切换桌面的页面),就可以将第一页面300上的卡包图标2201与桌面另一页面上的乐视视频图标312合并成新的分组,实现桌面上多个未分类图标的跨屏成组,因而用户的操作更为简单。That is to say, the user does not need to drag the card package icon 2201 to cut the screen (that is, switch the page of the desktop), and can merge the card package icon 2201 on the
此外,本申请实施例的图22-图23主要是以桌面上未分类的卡包图标2201为例进行说明的,对于桌面任意页面上其他任意被激活的未分类图标切换到另一页面上的分组的过程,可以参照本申请实施例中对卡包图标2201的处理过程,这里不予赘述。In addition, FIG. 22 to FIG. 23 in the embodiment of the present application are mainly described by using an uncategorized card package icon 2201 on the desktop as an example. For any other activated unclassified icon on any page of the desktop, switch to another page. For the grouping process, reference may be made to the processing of the card package icon 2201 in the embodiment of the present application, and details are not described herein.
当桌面上被激活的未分类图标归入已创建的分组或与其他未分类图标合并成新的分组后,桌面上不再直接显示该被激活的未分类图标,而在分组中显示该被激活的图标,并且电子设备还可以自动重排桌面上的分组和图标。When the activated unclassified icon on the desktop falls into the created group or merges with other unclassified icons into a new group, the activated unclassified icon is no longer directly displayed on the desktop, and the activated icon is displayed in the group. And the electronic device can also automatically rearrange the groups and icons on the desktop.
此外,电子设备还可以采用图4A-图18描述的图标处理过程,将桌面上被激活的未分类图标归入被激活的未分类图标所在页面上的分组,或者将桌面上被激活的未分类图标与被激活的未分类图标所在页面上的未分类图标合并成组,此处不予赘述。In addition, the electronic device can also use the icon processing process described in FIGS. 4A-18 to group the activated unclassified icons on the desktop into a group on the page where the activated unclassified icons are located, or group the activated unclassified icons on the desktop. The icon is merged with the unclassified icon on the page where the activated unclassified icon is located, which will not be described here.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图24所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 24, the method may include:
2401、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。2401. The electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
示例性的,第一页面可以为如图3中的(a)或如图22中的(a)所示的界面,第一应用图标可以是如图22的(a)中所示的卡包图标2201。Exemplarily, the first page may be an interface as shown in FIG. 3 (a) or FIG. 22 (a), and the first application icon may be a card package as shown in FIG. 22 (a) Icon 2201.
2402、电子设备响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。2402. The electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
示例性的,用户对第一应用图标的操作可以为,对卡包图标2201的长按操作、压力按操作、晃动操作或者在卡包图标2201位置画一个圆圈的手势操作等。Exemplarily, the operation performed by the user on the first application icon may be a long press operation, a press operation, a shaking operation, or a gesture operation of drawing a circle on the card bag icon 2201.
示例性的,设置分组控件可以是如图22中的(b)所示的合并分组控件2202,或者如图23中的(f)所示的合并至分组控件,或者还可以是如图17中(b)所示的设置分组悬浮球1702,或者还可以是如图18中的(a)所示的缓冲区1801等。Exemplarily, the set grouping control may be a
2403、电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组 界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。2403. The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation that the user drags the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
示例性的,用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作可以参见图22的(b)中,用户拖动卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)至合并至分组控件2202(即设置分组控件)的操作。Exemplarily, the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 22 (b). The user drags the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon) to merge into the grouping control 2202 (that is, setting Group control).
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图22中的(c)所示的界面,或者是如图23的(a)中所示的界面等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the like.
2404、电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。2404. The electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, the electronic device responds to the user continuing to drag the first application icon. For operations in the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group.
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图22中的(c)所示的界面,用户对第二分组的操作为如图22的(c)所示,用户将卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)继续拖动至购物分组311(即第二分组)的操作。响应于该操作,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201位于购物分组311中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, and the user ’s operation on the second grouping is as shown in (c) of FIG. 22, and the user moves the card pack icon 2201 (that is, the first application) Icon) to continue the operation of dragging to the shopping group 311 (ie, the second group). In response to this operation, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card pack icon 2201 is located in the
再示例性的,分组界面可以是如图23的(a)中所示的界面,用户对第二应用图标的操作为如图23的(a)所示,用户将卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)继续拖动至乐视视频图标312(即第二应用图标)的操作。响应于该操作,如图23中的(b)所示,卡包图标2201与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组。For another example, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the second application icon by the user is as shown in (a) of FIG. 23, and the user moves the card pack icon 2201 (that is, the first An application icon) continues to be dragged to the LeTV video icon 312 (that is, the second application icon). In response to this operation, as shown in (b) in FIG. 23, the card pack icon 2201 and the
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标拖动到分组界面上显示的第二应用图标的位置以组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can drag the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can drag the first application icon to the second application displayed on the grouping interface. The positions of the icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
在图24所描述的方案中,电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中,可以包括:电子设备响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组的操作,显示打开的第二分组;响应于用户继续拖动第一应用图标至第二分组中的目标位置的操作,根据目标位置在第二分组中显示第一应用图标。这样,电子设备可以根据用户在第二分组中停止拖动图标的落点位置,在第二分组中显示该第一应用图标。In the solution described in FIG. 24, the electronic device responds to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the second group, and the first application icon is located in the second group, which may include: the electronic device responds to the user continuing to drag the first The operation of an application icon to the second group displays the opened second group; in response to the operation of the user continuing to drag the first application icon to the target position in the second group, the first application is displayed in the second group according to the target position icon. In this way, the electronic device can display the first application icon in the second group according to the position where the user stops dragging the icon in the second group.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图25所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 25, the method may include:
2501、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。2501. The electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
2502、电子设备响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。2502. The electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
关于步骤2501-2502的说明可以参见上述步骤2401-2402的描述,此处不予赘述。For the description of steps 2501-2502, refer to the description of steps 2401-2402, which are not described here.
2503、电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。2503. The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to an operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
示例性的,用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作可以参见图22的(b)中,用户拖动卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)至合并至分组控件2202(即设置分组控件)并松手的操作。Exemplarily, the operation of the user dragging the first application icon to set the grouping control can refer to FIG. 22 (b). The user drags the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon) to merge into the grouping control 2202 (that is, setting Group controls) and let go.
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图22中的(e)所示的界面,或者,如图23的(c)所示的界面等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (e) in FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (c) in FIG. 23, and the like.
2504、电子设备响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。2504. The electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
示例性的,分组界面为如图22中的(e)所示的界面,用户对第二分组的操作为如图22的(e)中,用户点击选择购物分组311(即第二分组)的操作。响应于该操作,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201位于购物分组311中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the operation of the second group by the user is as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the user clicks to select the shopping group 311 (that is, the second group). operating. In response to this operation, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card pack icon 2201 is located in the
再示例性的,分组界面为如图23中的(c)所示的界面,用户对第二应用图标的操作为如图23的(c)所示的用户点击乐视视频图标312的操作。响应于该操作,如图23中的(b)所示,卡包图标2201与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组。As another example, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the user on the second application icon is the operation of clicking the
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon on the first page can be activated by the user to display the set group control. In response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the set group control, the electronic device The grouping interface can be displayed, so that the user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user can conveniently switch the first application icon on the first page and the first grouping icon displayed on the grouping interface. The two application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched to the new group.
在图25描述的方案中,可选地,电子设备响应于用户拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件后松手的操作,分组界面中的元素处于待选状态。这样,可以方便用户从分组界面中选择第二分组或第二应用图标。In the solution described in FIG. 25, optionally, the electronic device responds to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the group control by releasing the element, and the element in the grouping interface is in a standby state. In this way, the user can conveniently select the second group or the second application icon from the group interface.
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种图标切换方法,该方法可以在具有图2A-2C所示的硬件/软件结构的电子设备中实现。如图26所示,该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides an icon switching method, which can be implemented in an electronic device having the hardware / software structure shown in FIGS. 2A-2C. As shown in FIG. 26, the method may include:
2601、电子设备显示第一页面,第一页面上包括第一应用图标。2601. The electronic device displays a first page, and the first page includes a first application icon.
2602、电子设备响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示设置分组控件。2602. The electronic device displays a setting grouping control in response to a user operation on the first application icon.
关于步骤2601-2602的说明可以参见上述步骤2401-2402的描述,此处不予赘述。For the description of steps 2601-2602, refer to the description of steps 2401-2402 above, which will not be repeated here.
2603、电子设备响应于用户对设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。2603. The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user operation for setting a grouping control. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
示例性的,用户对设置分组控件的操作可以是如图22所示的(f)中,用户点击合并至分组控件(即设置分组控件)的操作;或者,当设置分组控件为如图17中的(b)所示的悬浮球1702时,用户对设置分组控件的操作还可以是用户将悬浮球1702拖动至卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)位置的操作等。Exemplarily, the operation of the user to set the grouping control may be as shown in (f) of FIG. 22, and the user clicks and merges into the grouping control (that is, setting the grouping control); or, when the grouping control is set as shown in FIG. When the
示例性的,分组界面可以是如图22中的(e)所示的界面,或者,如图23中的(c)所示的界面等。Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (e) in FIG. 22, or an interface as shown in (c) in FIG. 23, and the like.
2604、电子设备响应于用户对第二应用图标的操作,第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组;或,响应于用户对第二分组的操作,第一应用图标位于第二分组中。2604. The electronic device responds to the user's operation on the second application icon, and the first application icon and the second application icon form a new group; or, in response to the user's operation on the second group, the first application icon is located in the second group. .
示例性的,分组界面为如图22中的(e)所示的界面,用户对第二分组的操作为如图22的(e)中,用户点击购物分组311(即第二分组)的操作。响应于该操作,如图22中的(d)所示,卡包图标2201位于购物分组311中。Exemplarily, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, and the operation of the user on the second group is as shown in (e) of FIG. 22, the user clicks on the shopping group 311 (that is, the second group). . In response to this operation, as shown in (d) of FIG. 22, the card pack icon 2201 is located in the
再示例性的,分组界面为如图23中的(c)所示的界面,用户对第二应用图标的操作为如图23的(c)所示的用户点击乐视视频图标312的操作。响应于该操作,如 图23中的(b)所示,卡包图标2201与乐视视频图标312组成新的分组。As another example, the grouping interface is an interface as shown in (c) of FIG. 23, and the operation of the user on the second application icon is the operation of clicking the
在该方案中,通过用户对第一页面上的第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并显示设置分组控件,通过对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一页面上的第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成的新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, by operating a first application icon on a first page, a user can activate the first application icon and display a grouping control. By operating a grouping control, the electronic device can display a grouping interface, which is convenient. The user switches the first application icon on the first page to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or facilitates the user to create a new combination of the first application icon on the first page and the second application icon displayed on the grouping interface. Grouping to switch the first application icon into this new grouping.
在图24-图26描述的方案中,分组界面可以包括所有的分组。这样,可以方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标切换到桌面上的任意分组中。示例性的,分组界面可以为如图22的(c)或(e)所示的界面,分组界面包括桌面上的所有分组。In the scheme described in FIGS. 24-26, the grouping interface may include all groups. In this way, users can conveniently switch the first application icon on the desktop to any group on the desktop. Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (c) or (e) of FIG. 22, and the grouping interface includes all groups on the desktop.
或者,在图24-图26描述的方案中,分组界面可以包括桌面上的所有分组和除第一应用图标以外的其他图标。这样,可以方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标切换到桌面上已有的分组中,或者方便用户将桌面上的第一应用图标与桌面上第一应用图标以外的其他应用图标组成新的分组。示例性的,分组界面可以为如图23的(a)或(c)所示的界面,分组界面包括桌面上的所有分组和除卡包图标2201(即第一应用图标)以外的其他应用图标。Alternatively, in the solutions described in FIG. 24-26, the grouping interface may include all groups on the desktop and other icons except the first application icon. In this way, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon on the desktop to an existing group on the desktop, or it is convenient for the user to form a new group of the first application icon on the desktop and an application icon other than the first application icon on the desktop. . Exemplarily, the grouping interface may be an interface as shown in (a) or (c) of FIG. 23. The grouping interface includes all the groups on the desktop and other application icons except the card package icon 2201 (that is, the first application icon). .
结合上述实施例及相应的附图,本申请另一实施例提供一种显示图形用户界面GUI的方法,应用于电子设备,附图虽未示出,但该方法可以包括:With reference to the above embodiments and corresponding drawings, another embodiment of the present application provides a method for displaying a graphical user interface GUI, which is applied to an electronic device. Although the drawings are not shown, the method may include:
(1)、电子设备响应于用户对第一应用图标的操作,显示第一GUI,第一GUI上包括设置分组控件,其中,第一应用图标位于桌面的第一页面上,或者第一应用图标位于第一页面上的第一分组中。(1) The electronic device displays a first GUI in response to a user operation on the first application icon, and the first GUI includes a setting grouping control, where the first application icon is located on a first page of the desktop or the first application icon In the first group on the first page.
示例性的,第一GUI可以图16A的(b)中所示的包括更改分组控件1601(即设置分组控件)的界面,如图17的(a)中所示的包括更改分组控件1701(即设置分组控件)的界面,如图17的(b)中所示的包括更改分组悬浮球1702(即设置分组控件)的界面、或者如图22中的(b)所示的包括合并至分组控件2201(即设置分组控件)的界面,或者如图22中的(f)所示的包括合并至分组控件(即设置分组控件)的界面等。Exemplarily, the first GUI may include an interface including changing a grouping control 1601 (ie, setting a grouping control) shown in FIG. 16A (b), and including changing a grouping control 1701 (ie, shown in FIG. 17 (a)) Set the group control) interface, as shown in Figure 17 (b) includes the interface to change the group hoverball 1702 (that is, set the group control), or as shown in Figure 22 (b) includes the merge to group control An interface of 2201 (that is, setting a grouping control), or an interface including a grouping control (that is, setting a grouping control) as shown in (f) in FIG. 22, and the like.
(2)、电子设备响应于用户对第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组;或者,响应于用户将第一应用图标拖动至第一GUI上设置分组控件的操作,显示分组界面,分组界面包括第一元素,第一元素为第二应用图标或第二分组。(2) The electronic device displays a grouping interface in response to a user's operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI, and the grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second group; or, Drag the first application icon to the operation of setting a grouping control on the first GUI to display a grouping interface. The grouping interface includes a first element, and the first element is a second application icon or a second grouping.
在该方案中,通过用户对第一应用图标的操作,可以激活第一应用图标,并在第一GUI上显示设置分组控件,响应于拖动第一应用图标至设置分组控件的操作或者响应于对设置分组控件的操作,电子设备可以显示分组界面,从而方便用户将第一应用图标切换到分组界面上显示的第二分组中,或者方便用户将第一应用图标与分组界面上显示的第二应用图标组成新的分组,从而将第一应用图标切换到该新的分组中。In this solution, the first application icon can be activated by the user's operation on the first application icon, and the setting group control is displayed on the first GUI, in response to the operation of dragging the first application icon to the setting group control or in response to For the operation of setting the grouping control, the electronic device can display the grouping interface, thereby facilitating the user to switch the first application icon to the second group displayed on the grouping interface, or the user to conveniently switch the first application icon to the second grouping displayed on the grouping interface. The application icons form a new group, so that the first application icon is switched into the new group.
可以理解的,上述实施例中提到的设置分组控件也可以叫做其他控件,例如聚合控件、合并控件等,只要能达到实施例中描述的设置分组控件的功能都可以理解为是本发明实施例中提到的设置分组控件。It can be understood that the setting grouping control mentioned in the above embodiment can also be called other controls, such as aggregate control, merge control, etc., as long as the function of setting the grouping control described in the embodiment can be understood as an embodiment of the present invention Set the grouping control mentioned in.
在本申请上述实施例描述的方案中,第一元素可以是第一页面上的元素,此时, 可以方便用户将第一页面上第一分组中的第一应用图标切换到第一页面上的第二分组中,或者将第一页面上第一分组中的第一应用图标与第一页面上的第二应用图标组成新的分组。In the solution described in the foregoing embodiment of the present application, the first element may be an element on the first page. At this time, it is convenient for the user to switch the first application icon in the first group on the first page to the icon on the first page. In the second group, the first application icon in the first group on the first page and the second application icon on the first page form a new group.
在本申请上述实施例描述的方案中,第一元素也可以是第二页面上的元素,此时,用户不需要拖动第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标进行切屏,就可以将第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标切换至第二页面上的第二分组中;或者,就可以将第一页面上的第一分组中的第一应用图标与第二页面上的第二应用图标组成新的分组。并且,用户不需要拖动第一页面上的第一应用图标进行切屏,就可以将第一页面上的第一应用图标切换至第二页面上的第二分组中;或者,就可以将第一页面上的第一应用图标与第二页面上的第二应用图标组成新的分组。因而,用户的操作更为简单。In the solution described in the foregoing embodiment of the present application, the first element may also be an element on a second page. At this time, the user does not need to drag the first application icon in the first group on the first page to cut the screen. You can switch the first application icon in the first group on the first page to the second group on the second page; or you can change the first application icon in the first group on the first page The second application icon on the second page forms a new group. In addition, the user can switch the first application icon on the first page to the second group on the second page without dragging the first application icon on the first page to cut the screen; or, the first The first application icon on one page and the second application icon on the second page form a new group. Therefore, the user's operation is simpler.
示例性的,第一应用图标可以为第一页面上第一分组中的搜狐视频图标307,第二分组可以为第二页面上的影音分组310,第二应用图标可以为第二页面上的乐视视频图标312。再示例性的,第一应用图标可以为第一页面上的卡包图标2201,第二分组可以是第二页面上的购物图标311,第二应用图标可以是第二页面上的乐视视频图标312。Exemplarily, the first application icon may be the
在本申请上述实施例描述的方案中,在第一应用图标位于第二分组中之后,若电子设备检测到用户点击返回键的操作,则电子设备显示第二分组所在的页面。这样,可以方便用户返回第一应用图标切换后的分组所在的页面。In the solution described in the foregoing embodiment of the present application, after the first application icon is located in the second group, if the electronic device detects an operation of the user to click the return key, the electronic device displays a page on which the second group is located. In this way, it is convenient for the user to return to the page where the group after the first application icon is switched is located.
示例性的,如图3中的(b)所示,影音分组310为第二页面上的分组,在图4A中搜狐视频图标307位于影音分组310中之后,若电子设备检测到用户点击返回键的操作,则如图4B的(a)所示,电子设备显示影音分组310所在的第二页面。Exemplarily, as shown in (b) of FIG. 3, the audio and
另外,本申请另一实施例还提供了一种图标切换方法,可以应用于具有抽屉模式的电子设备。在抽屉模式下,电子设备可以包括一个或多个抽屉界面,每个抽屉界面可以包括多个元素。示例性的,如图27中的(a)或(b)所示,当用户点击抽屉按钮2701时,参见图27中的(c),电子设备显示抽屉中的元素(例如图标、widget或分组)。其中,抽屉按钮2701还可以在需要使用时调出,在不需要使用时隐藏。在一种情况下,桌面上可以包括用户常用的元素,抽屉中可以包括用户不常用的元素,或者抽屉中可以包括电子设备上所有的元素。In addition, another embodiment of the present application also provides an icon switching method, which can be applied to an electronic device having a drawer mode. In the drawer mode, the electronic device may include one or more drawer interfaces, and each drawer interface may include multiple elements. Exemplarily, as shown in (a) or (b) of FIG. 27, when the user clicks the
例如,在一种可能的实现方式中,在进行图标处理时,桌面中的元素与抽屉界面上的元素可以是隔离的,电子设备可以采用上述图4A-图23所示的方法在桌面各页面间对桌面上的图标进行处理;或者,电子设备可以采用上述图4A-图23所示的方法在抽屉模式对抽屉界面上的图标进行处理。For example, in a possible implementation manner, during icon processing, elements on the desktop and elements on the drawer interface may be isolated, and the electronic device may use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 on each page of the desktop. At times, the icons on the desktop are processed; or, the electronic device may use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 to process the icons on the drawer interface in the drawer mode.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,抽屉界面可以理解为桌面的页面,电子设备可以采用上述图4A-图23所示的方法在桌面的不同页面(包括抽屉界面)之间对图标进行处理。In another possible implementation manner, the drawer interface can be understood as a desktop page, and the electronic device can use the method shown in FIG. 4A to FIG. 23 to process icons between different pages on the desktop (including the drawer interface).
在另一种可能的实现方式中,抽屉界面可以理解为桌面的页面。在一种情况下,分组界面上显示的元素中携带有模式标识,该模式标识用于标记该元素来源于桌面还是来源于抽屉界面。当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面上选择一个来源于桌面的元素时,电子设备将被激活的图标归入桌面的分组中;当电子设备检测到用户在分组界面 上选择一个来源于抽屉界面的元素时,电子设备将被激活的图标归入抽屉界面的分组中。在另一种情况下,当电子设备确定被激活图标来源于桌面时,将被激活图标归入的分组显示在桌面上;当电子设备确定被激活图标来源于抽屉界面时,将被激活图标归入的分组显示在抽屉界面上。In another possible implementation manner, the drawer interface can be understood as a page on the desktop. In one case, the element displayed on the grouping interface carries a pattern identifier, and the pattern identifier is used to mark whether the element originates from the desktop or the drawer interface. When the electronic device detects that the user selects an element from the desktop on the grouping interface, the electronic device classifies the activated icon into the group of the desktop; when the electronic device detects that the user selects an element from the drawer interface on the grouping interface When the element is selected, the electronic device groups the activated icon into a group in the drawer interface. In another case, when the electronic device determines that the activated icon originates from the desktop, the grouping of the activated icon is displayed on the desktop; when the electronic device determines that the activated icon originates from the drawer interface, the activated icon returns The incoming group is displayed on the drawer interface.
此外,如实施例开头所述,电子设备可以通过应用程序层、应用程序框架层、函数库层和Linux内核层等软件层之间的相互配合,以及应用程序框架层各模块之间的配合来实现图标处理功能。具体的,在实现图标处理功能时,当用户想要使用本申请上述实施例中图4A-图27提供的图标切换方法对电子设备上安装的应用图标进行分组时,可以执行用于指示启动图标分组功能的输入。应用程序框架层监测到用户的输入时,通知应用程序层的图标分组应用。应用程序层中的图标分组应用通过相关API访问应用程序框架层提供的图标分组接口管理服务,以实现图标分组功能,从而将图标切换至另一个分组或者将图标归入一个新创建的分组。系统运行库层和Linux内核层用于对实现图标分组功能时系统的正常运转做支撑。In addition, as described at the beginning of the embodiment, the electronic device can cooperate with the software layers such as the application layer, the application framework layer, the function library layer, and the Linux kernel layer, and the cooperation between the modules of the application framework layer. Implement icon processing functions. Specifically, when the icon processing function is implemented, when a user wants to use the icon switching method provided in FIG. 4A to FIG. 27 in the foregoing embodiment of the present application to group application icons installed on an electronic device, the user may execute an instruction to start the icon. Input for grouping function. When the application framework layer detects the user's input, it notifies the application layer to group the applications. The icon grouping application in the application layer accesses the icon grouping interface management service provided by the application framework layer through related APIs to implement the icon grouping function, thereby switching the icon to another group or grouping the icon into a newly created group. The system runtime layer and the Linux kernel layer are used to support the normal operation of the system when the icon grouping function is implemented.
以下将通过举例说明的方式,对电子设备通过应用程序框架层中输入管理模块、窗口管理模块、活动管理模块、分组管理模块和应用管理模块等各模块之间的配合来实现本申请上述实施例提供的图标切换功能进行具体阐述。In the following, the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application is implemented by way of example through the cooperation between the input management module, window management module, activity management module, group management module, and application management module in the application framework layer. The icon switching function provided is described in detail.
例如,以图16A描述的将搜狐视频图标307通过设置分组控件切换到影音分组310的过程为例进行说明。For example, the process of switching the
当用户在第一页面300上触发打开娱乐分组305之后,如图16A中的(a)所示,窗口管理模块显示打开的娱乐分组305。当输入管理模块检测到用户压力按搜狐视频图标307这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为搜狐视频图标307,并通知活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知窗口管理模块显示菜单列表和打开的娱乐分组305,该菜单列表中包括设置分组控件(即更改分组控件1601)、分享控件和卸载控件等。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,在如图16A的(b)所示的界面上显示菜单列表和打开的娱乐分组305。After the user triggers the opening of the
然后,如图16A的(c)所示,当输入管理模块检测到用户将娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组控件1601这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为搜狐视频图标307,并通知活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块在接收到窗口管理模块的通知后,从应用分组模块获取桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组,以及各分组中包括的应用名称和应用图标。其中,应用分组模块保存的各应用的应用名称和应用图标等应用信息是从应用管理模块获取的。活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:隐藏娱乐分组305中除搜狐视频图标307以外的其他图标,更新视图,通知窗口管理模块显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的其他分组。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,在如图16A中的(d)所示的分组界面1602上显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上娱乐分组305以外的其 他分组。Then, as shown in (c) of FIG. 16A, when the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the
而后,如图16A的(e)所示,当输入管理模块检测到用户在图16A中的(c)所示的拖动操作后未松手持续将搜狐视频图标307拖动至影音分组310中这一输入事件时,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为搜狐视频图标307和影音分组310,并通知活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307和影音分组310对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知分组管理模块更新分组信息,并通知窗口管理模块在影音分组310中展示搜狐视频图标307。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,显示如图16A的(f)所示的界面,在该界面上的影音分组310的缩略图中显示搜狐视频图标307。分组管理模块更新影音分组310与搜狐视频图标307的对应关系,并删除搜狐视频图标307与娱乐分组305的对应关系。Then, as shown in (e) of FIG. 16A, when the input management module detects that the user has not let go after dragging the operation shown in (c) of FIG. 16A, the
再例如,以图16A的(a)、(b)、(c)、(d)、(f)和图16B描述的将搜狐视频图标307通过设置分组控件切换到影音分组310的过程为例进行说明。与以上描述的图16A的具体实现过程的不同之处在于:For another example, the process of switching the
当输入管理模块检测到用户将娱乐分组305中的搜狐视频图标307拖动至更改分组控件1601这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为搜狐视频图标307,并通知活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块在接收到窗口管理模块的通知后,从应用分组模块获取桌面各页面上娱乐分组305以外的其他分组,以及各分组中包括的应用名称和应用图标。其中,应用分组模块保存的各应用的应用名称和应用图标等应用信息是从应用管理模块获取的。活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知窗口管理模块显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上除娱乐分组305以外的所有其他分组。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,在如图16A中的(d)所示的分组界面1602上显示搜狐视频图标307和桌面各页面上娱乐分组305以外的其他分组。When the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the
而后,当输入管理模块检测到用户在图16A中的(d)所示的界面上松手这一输入事件时,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为搜狐视频图标307并通知活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知窗口管理模块隐藏搜狐视频图标307。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,显示如图16B的(a)所示的界面,隐藏搜狐视频图标307,并显示每个分组的选择框,该选择框是空白的,用于表示分组处于待选状态。Then, when the input management module detects that the user releases the input event on the interface shown in (d) in FIG. 16A, it determines that the associated element triggered by the input event is the
之后,如图16B的(b)所示,当输入管理模块检测到用户在点击选中影音分组310,并点击确定按钮这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,在影音分组310位置显示选中标识,并确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为影音分组310,通知活动管理模块执行影音分组310对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行搜狐视频图标307对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知分组管理模块更新分组信息,并通知窗口管理模块在影音分组310中展示搜狐视频图标307。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的 通知后,显示如图16A的(f)所示的界面,在该界面上的影音分组310的缩略图中显示搜狐视频图标307。分组管理模块更新影音分组310与搜狐视频图标307的对应关系,并删除搜狐视频图标307与娱乐分组305的对应关系。After that, as shown in (b) of FIG. 16B, when the input management module detects the input event that the user clicks to select the audio /
再例如,以图22中的(a)和(b)结合图23中的(a)和(b)描述的将卡包图标2201与乐视视频图标312合并成组为例进行说明。如图22中的(a)所示,窗口管理模块显示桌面的第一页面300。当输入管理模块检测到用户压力按卡包图标2201这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为卡包图标2201,并通知活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知窗口管理模块显示菜单列表和第一页面300,该菜单列表中包括设置分组控件(例如合并至分组控件2202)、分享控件和卸载控件等。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,在如图22的(b)所示的界面上显示菜单列表和第一页面300。For another example, the combination of the card icon 2201 and the
当输入管理模块检测到用户将卡包图标2201拖动至合并至分组控件2202这一输入事件时,输入管理模块将该输入事件通知给窗口管理模块。窗口管理模块在接收到该输入事件后,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为卡包图标2201,并通知活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块在接收到窗口管理模块的通知后,从应用分组模块获取桌面各页面上的所有分组,以及各分组中包括的应用名称和应用图标,并从应用管理模块获取桌面上未分类应用的应用名称和应用图标。其中,应用分组模块保存的各应用的应用名称和应用图标等应用信息是从应用管理模块获取的。活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知窗口管理模块分别显示卡包图标2201,以及桌面各页面上所有的分组以及除卡包图标2201以外的所有未分类图标。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,在如图23中的(a)所示的分组界面的上方显示卡包图标2201,在分组界面的下方显示桌面各页面上所有的分组以及除卡包图标2201以外的所有未分类图标。When the input management module detects an input event that the user drags the card pack icon 2201 to the merged into the
而后,当输入管理模块检测到用户在图22中的(b)所示的拖动操作后未松手持续将卡包图标2201拖动至图23的(a)中所示的乐视视频图标312位置这一输入事件时,确定该输入事件触发的关联元素为卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312,并通知活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312对应于该输入事件的处理业务。活动管理模块执行卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312对应于该输入事件的处理业务包括:更新视图,通知分组管理模块创建新的分组2301,通知窗口管理模块在新的分组2301中展示卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312。窗口管理模块在接收到活动管理模块的通知后,显示如图23的(b)所示的界面,在该界面上的新的分组2301的缩略图中显示卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312。分组管理模块更新新的分组2301与卡包图标2201和乐视视频图标312的对应关系。Then, when the input management module detects that the user has not released the drag operation after continuously dragging the card icon 2201 to the position of the
可以理解的是,电子设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件和/或软件模块。结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员 可以结合实施例对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It can be understood that, in order to implement the foregoing functions, the electronic device includes hardware and / or software modules corresponding to performing each function. With reference to the algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is performed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiments of the present application may divide the functional modules of the electronic device according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules may be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图28示出了上述实施例中涉及的电子设备2800的一种可能的组成示意图,如图28所示,该电子设备2800可以包括:显示单元2801、输入单元2802和处理单元2803。In a case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 28 illustrates a possible composition diagram of the electronic device 2800 involved in the foregoing embodiment. As shown in FIG. 28, the electronic device 2800 may include: a display unit 2801, an input unit 2802, and a processing unit 2803.
其中,显示单元2801可以用于支持电子设备2800执行上述步骤1901、步骤2001、步骤2101、步骤2401、步骤2501和步骤2601中显示第一页面的操作;支持电子设备2800执行上述步骤1902、步骤2002和步骤2102中显示打开的第一分组的操作;支持电子设备2800执行步骤1903、步骤2003、步骤2103、步骤2402、步骤2502和步骤2602中显示设置分组控件的操作;支持电子设备2800执行上述步骤1904、步骤2004、步骤2104、步骤2403、步骤2503和步骤2603中显示分组界面的操作;和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The display unit 2801 may be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the operations of displaying the first page in the
输入单元2802可以用于支持电子设备2800执行图19-图21以及图24-图26中接收用户对第一分组的操作、对第一应用图标的操作、对设置分组控件的操作、对第二分组的操作以及对第二应用图标的操作等的步骤;和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The input unit 2802 can be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the operations of the user receiving the first group, the operation of the first application icon, the operation of setting the group control, and the operation of the second group in FIGS. Steps of grouped operations and operations on second application icons, etc .; and / or other processes for the techniques described herein.
处理单元2803可以用于支持电子设备2800执行上述步骤1905、步骤2005、步骤2105、步骤2404、步骤2504和步骤2604中第一应用图标和第二应用图标组成新的分组或第一应用图标位于第二分组中的操作;和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The processing unit 2803 may be used to support the electronic device 2800 to perform the above-mentioned
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of each step involved in the foregoing method embodiments can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供的电子设备,用于执行上述图标切换的实现方法,因此可以达到与上述图标切换的实现方法相同的效果。The electronic device provided in the embodiment of the present application is configured to perform the foregoing method for implementing icon switching, and therefore, the same effect as that of the foregoing method for implementing icon switching can be achieved.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,电子设备可以包括处理模块和存储模块。其中,处理模块可以用于对电子设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,可以用于支持电子设备执行上述显示单元2801、输入单元2802和处理单元2803执行的步骤。存储模块可以用于支持电子设备存储应用图标的名称应用图标与分组的对应关系,以及存储程序代码和数据等。另外,电子设备还可以包括通信模块,可以用于支持电子设备与其他设备的通信。In the case where an integrated unit is adopted, the electronic device may include a processing module and a storage module. The processing module may be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device. For example, the processing module may be used to support the electronic device to execute the steps performed by the display unit 2801, the input unit 2802, and the processing unit 2803. The storage module may be used to support the correspondence between the name of the application icon and the group, and the storage of the program code and data in the electronic device. In addition, the electronic device may further include a communication module, which may be used to support communication between the electronic device and other devices.
其中,处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)和微处理器的组合等等。存储模块可以是存储器。通信模块具体可以为射频电路、蓝牙芯片、wifi芯片等与其他电子设备交互的设备。The processing module may be a processor or a controller. It may implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in connection with the disclosure of this application. The processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination including one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, and so on. The memory module may be a memory. The communication module may specifically be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, and a wifi chip.
在一个实施例中,当处理模块为处理器,存储模块为存储器时,本申请实施例所 涉及的电子设备可以为具有图2A所示结构的设备。In one embodiment, when the processing module is a processor and the storage module is a memory, the electronic device involved in the embodiment of the present application may be a device having a structure shown in FIG. 2A.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当该计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的图标切换的实现方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer storage medium. The computer storage medium stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions are run on the electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the related method steps to implement the icon switching in the foregoing embodiment. Implementation.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述相关步骤,以实现上述实施例中的图标切换的实现方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, and when the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the foregoing related steps to implement the method for implementing icon switching in the foregoing embodiment.
另外,本申请的实施例还提供一种装置,这个装置具体可以是芯片,组件或模块,该装置可包括相连的处理器和存储器;其中,存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,当装置运行时,处理器可执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,以使芯片执行上述各方法实施例中的图标切换的实现方法。In addition, an embodiment of the present application further provides a device. The device may specifically be a chip, a component, or a module. The device may include a connected processor and a memory. The memory is used to store instructions executed by a computer. The processor may execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the method for implementing icon switching in the foregoing method embodiments.
其中,本申请实施例提供的电子设备、计算机存储介质、计算机程序产品或芯片均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。The electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product, or chip provided in the embodiments of the present application are used to execute the corresponding methods provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding methods provided above The beneficial effects in the method are not repeated here.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。When the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on such an understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application essentially or partly contribute to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solutions may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium The instructions include a number of instructions for causing a device (which can be a single-chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
以上内容,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Covered within the scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (19)
Priority Applications (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201880085342.4A CN111602381A (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2018-07-02 | Icon switching method, method for displaying GUI (graphical user interface) and electronic equipment |
| PCT/CN2018/094137 WO2020006669A1 (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2018-07-02 | Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2018/094137 WO2020006669A1 (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2018-07-02 | Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2020006669A1 true WO2020006669A1 (en) | 2020-01-09 |
Family
ID=69059890
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2018/094137 Ceased WO2020006669A1 (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2018-07-02 | Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN111602381A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2020006669A1 (en) |
Cited By (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113805755A (en) * | 2021-09-24 | 2021-12-17 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Desktop layout method and device and electronic equipment |
| CN114895823A (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2022-08-12 | 深圳市掌阅科技有限公司 | Menu display method, electronic device and storage medium |
| CN115061607A (en) * | 2021-02-27 | 2022-09-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Function page display method and electronic equipment |
| CN115185442A (en) * | 2022-07-07 | 2022-10-14 | 广东明创软件科技有限公司 | Operation parameter control method, processor, terminal and storage medium |
| CN115185440A (en) * | 2021-04-07 | 2022-10-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Control display method and related equipment |
| US20230195298A1 (en) * | 2020-08-28 | 2023-06-22 | Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. | Permission setting method and apparatus and electronic device |
Families Citing this family (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN115658216B (en) * | 2022-12-26 | 2023-03-31 | 飞腾信息技术有限公司 | Application program window processing method and device and computer readable storage medium |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2008085746A2 (en) * | 2007-01-07 | 2008-07-17 | Apple Inc. | Portable multifunction device, method and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects adaptively |
| CN102364438A (en) * | 2011-10-10 | 2012-02-29 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | Application program display and classification method, terminal and mobile terminal |
| CN103605464A (en) * | 2013-11-29 | 2014-02-26 | 深圳市朗司科技有限公司 | Desktop application icon across-screen combination method |
| CN104881211A (en) * | 2015-06-18 | 2015-09-02 | 上海斐讯数据通信技术有限公司 | Folder classifying method, system and mobile terminal |
| CN107562323A (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2018-01-09 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Icon moving method, device and terminal |
Family Cites Families (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN102981711A (en) * | 2012-11-22 | 2013-03-20 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method and system for moving application icons on touch screen |
-
2018
- 2018-07-02 WO PCT/CN2018/094137 patent/WO2020006669A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2018-07-02 CN CN201880085342.4A patent/CN111602381A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2008085746A2 (en) * | 2007-01-07 | 2008-07-17 | Apple Inc. | Portable multifunction device, method and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects adaptively |
| CN102364438A (en) * | 2011-10-10 | 2012-02-29 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | Application program display and classification method, terminal and mobile terminal |
| CN103605464A (en) * | 2013-11-29 | 2014-02-26 | 深圳市朗司科技有限公司 | Desktop application icon across-screen combination method |
| CN104881211A (en) * | 2015-06-18 | 2015-09-02 | 上海斐讯数据通信技术有限公司 | Folder classifying method, system and mobile terminal |
| CN107562323A (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2018-01-09 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Icon moving method, device and terminal |
Cited By (10)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20230195298A1 (en) * | 2020-08-28 | 2023-06-22 | Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. | Permission setting method and apparatus and electronic device |
| US11934648B2 (en) * | 2020-08-28 | 2024-03-19 | Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. | Permission setting method and apparatus and electronic device |
| CN115061607A (en) * | 2021-02-27 | 2022-09-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Function page display method and electronic equipment |
| CN115185440A (en) * | 2021-04-07 | 2022-10-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Control display method and related equipment |
| CN115185440B (en) * | 2021-04-07 | 2024-05-10 | 华为技术有限公司 | Control display method and related equipment |
| CN113805755A (en) * | 2021-09-24 | 2021-12-17 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Desktop layout method and device and electronic equipment |
| CN114895823A (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2022-08-12 | 深圳市掌阅科技有限公司 | Menu display method, electronic device and storage medium |
| CN114895823B (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2024-05-03 | 深圳市掌阅科技有限公司 | Menu display method, electronic device, and storage medium |
| CN115185442A (en) * | 2022-07-07 | 2022-10-14 | 广东明创软件科技有限公司 | Operation parameter control method, processor, terminal and storage medium |
| CN115185442B (en) * | 2022-07-07 | 2024-06-04 | 广东明创软件科技有限公司 | Operation parameter control method, processor, terminal and storage medium |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN111602381A (en) | 2020-08-28 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP6426262B2 (en) | Touch event model programming interface | |
| EP3783462B1 (en) | Method for displaying virtual keyboard of input method, and terminal | |
| KR102064952B1 (en) | Electronic device for operating application using received data | |
| US12032820B2 (en) | Fast data copying method and electronic device | |
| CN107111496B (en) | Customizable blade applications | |
| WO2020006669A1 (en) | Icon switching method, method for displaying gui, and electronic device | |
| EP2487555B1 (en) | Operating method of terminal based on multiple inputs and portable terminal supporting the same | |
| EP3510517B1 (en) | Method of displaying user interface related to user authentication and electronic device for implementing same | |
| EP3757739B1 (en) | Method for display when exiting an application, and terminal | |
| WO2019206158A1 (en) | Interface displaying method, apparatus, and device | |
| CN108463799B (en) | Flexible display of electronic device and operation method thereof | |
| WO2018040010A1 (en) | Application interface display method and terminal device | |
| CN108476257A (en) | Electronic device and method for managing applications thereof | |
| CN112347048B (en) | Electronic device and method for sharing data thereof | |
| CN110032324A (en) | Text selection method and terminal | |
| CN112148499B (en) | Data reporting method, device, computer equipment and medium | |
| WO2019178865A1 (en) | Application window display method and terminal | |
| TW201617839A (en) | Light dismiss manager | |
| EP3800535B1 (en) | Method and terminal for controlling shortcut button | |
| CN107430472A (en) | System and method for mobile device operation system | |
| WO2020019330A1 (en) | Mail translation method, and electronic device | |
| WO2019136964A1 (en) | Text selecting method and terminal | |
| CN108780400B (en) | Data processing method and electronic equipment | |
| JP7319431B2 (en) | Application function implementation method and electronic device | |
| CN116301474A (en) | Application card opening method and related equipment |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 18925300 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 18925300 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |